You are on page 1of 323

ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.

0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Table of Contents

1. 3D FRAME (WITH THE USE OF THE ROBOT MILLENNIUM LAYOUTS) ................................... 5


1.1 STRUCTURE MODEL DEFINITION ........................................................................................................ 6
1.2 STRUCTURE ANALYSIS ........................................................................................................................ 10
1.3 RESULT ANALYSIS................................................................................................................................. 10
1.4 STEEL DESIGN......................................................................................................................................... 11
1.5 DESIGN OF STEEL CONNECTIONS...................................................................................................... 12
1.6 STRESS ANALYSIS ................................................................................................................................. 13
2. 2D FRAME (WITHOUT THE USE OF THE ROBOT MILLENNIUM LAYOUTS)......................... 15
2.1 STRUCTURE MODEL DEFINITION ...................................................................................................... 16
2.1.1 Structure Bar Definition ...................................................................................................................... 17
2.1.2 Library Structure Definition ................................................................................................................ 18
2.1.3 Support Definition ............................................................................................................................... 20
2.1.4 Load Case Definition........................................................................................................................... 20
2.1.5 Definition of Loads for Generated Cases ............................................................................................ 21
2.2 STRUCTURE ANALYSIS ........................................................................................................................ 22
2.3 RESULT ANALYSIS................................................................................................................................. 23
2.4 RC BEAM DESIGN WITH TORSION CONSIDERED ........................................................................... 24
2.5 RC COLUMN DESIGN ............................................................................................................................. 25
2.6 DESIGN OF RC MEMBERS..................................................................................................................... 28
3. CONCRETE SLAB .................................................................................................................................... 29
3.1 STRUCTURE MODEL DEFINITION ...................................................................................................... 29
3.1.1 Contour Definition............................................................................................................................... 29
3.1.2 Mesh Definition ................................................................................................................................... 30
3.1.3 Slab Properties .................................................................................................................................... 30
3.1.4 Opening Properties.............................................................................................................................. 31
3.1.5 Support Definition ............................................................................................................................... 31
3.1.6 Load Case Definition........................................................................................................................... 32
3.1.7 Definition of Loads for Generated Cases ............................................................................................ 33
3.1.8 Display of Generated Load Cases ....................................................................................................... 34
3.2 STRUCTURE ANALYSIS / RESULTS (MAPS ON PANELS CUTS) .................................................... 35
3.3 CALCULATIONS OF THE REQUIRED (THEORETICAL) REINFORCEMENT AREA ..................... 37
3.4. CALCULATIONS OF THE PROVIDED (REAL) REINFORCEMENT AREA ..................................... 38
4. EXAMPLES OF STRUCTURE DEFINITIONS (EXTRUDE AND REVOLVE OPTIONS) ............. 40
4.1 SILO ........................................................................................................................................................... 40
4.2 COOLER .................................................................................................................................................... 45
4.3 PIPELINE................................................................................................................................................... 47
4.4 AXISYMMETRICAL STRUCTURES...................................................................................................... 50
5. DESIGN OF A 2D FRAME ....................................................................................................................... 54
5.1 STRUCTURE MODEL DEFINITION ...................................................................................................... 55
5.2 DEFINITION OF LOAD CASES AND LOADS....................................................................................... 56
5.3 DEFINITION OF SNOW/WIND LOADS................................................................................................. 57
5.4 STRUCTURE ANALYSIS ........................................................................................................................ 58
5.5 DETAILED ANALYSIS ............................................................................................................................ 58
5.6 STRUCTURE DESIGN ............................................................................................................................. 59
5.7 GLOBAL ANALYSIS................................................................................................................................ 62
5.8 DESIGN OF STEEL CONNECTIONS...................................................................................................... 63
5.9 PRINTOUT COMPOSITION .................................................................................................................... 64
6. DEFINITION OF MOVING LOADS FOR A 2D FRAME .................................................................... 66

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 1


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

6.1 DEFINITION OF THE STRUCTURE MODEL ....................................................................................... 67


6.1.1 Definition of Structure Bars................................................................................................................. 67
6.1.2 Definition of Library Structures (a Roof and an Overhead Traveling Crane Beam) .......................... 68
6.1.3 Support Definition ............................................................................................................................... 70
6.1.4 Definition of Structure Loads .............................................................................................................. 71
6.1.5 Definition of a Moving Load Applied to the Structure ........................................................................ 72
6.2 STRUCTURE ANALYSIS ........................................................................................................................ 74
6.3 PRESENTATION OF THE VEHICLE AND THE MOVING LOAD CASE ........................................... 75
6.4 RESULT ANALYSIS................................................................................................................................. 75
6.5 INFLUENCE LINES.................................................................................................................................. 76
7. 3D WORKSHOP WITH A MOVING CRANE ....................................................................................... 78
7.1 DEFINITION OF THE STRUCTURE MODEL ....................................................................................... 79
7.2 STRUCTURE ANALYSIS ........................................................................................................................ 90
7.3 STRUCTURE DESIGN ............................................................................................................................. 92
7.4 INFLUENCE LINES.................................................................................................................................. 96
8. 3D BRIDGE WITH A MOVING LOAD.................................................................................................. 99
8.1 DEFINITION OF THE STRUCTURE MODEL ..................................................................................... 101
8.1.1 Definition of Structure Geometry ...................................................................................................... 101
8.1.2 Load Definition.................................................................................................................................. 107
8.1.3 Definition of the Moving Load Applied to the Bridge Floor ............................................................. 110
8.2 STRUCTURE ANALYSIS ...................................................................................................................... 114
8.2.1 Result Presentation in the Form of Maps .......................................................................................... 114
8.3 STRUCTURE MEMBER DESIGN ......................................................................................................... 115
8.3.1 Structure Design ................................................................................................................................ 116
8.4 TIME HISTORY ANALYSIS.................................................................................................................. 122
9. VOLUMETRIC STRUCTURE ............................................................................................................... 127
9.1 DEFINITION OF STRUCTURE MODEL .............................................................................................. 128
9.2 STRUCTURE ANALYSIS ...................................................................................................................... 141
9.3 PRESENTATION OF RESULTS IN THE FORM OF MAPS ................................................................ 142
10. BAR STRUCTURE DESIGN (ELASTO-PLASTIC ANALYSIS) ................................................... 144
10.1 DEFINITION OF THE STRUCTURE MODEL ................................................................................... 145
10.1.1 Code Selection ................................................................................................................................. 145
10.1.2 Definition of Structural Axis............................................................................................................ 145
10.1.3 Definition of Structure Bars............................................................................................................. 146
10.1.4 Definition of a Library Structure ..................................................................................................... 148
10.1.5 Addition of an Auxiliary Node ......................................................................................................... 149
10.1.6 Definition of Brackets on Bars ........................................................................................................ 149
10.1.7 Definition of Supports...................................................................................................................... 150
10.1.8 Definition of Geometrical Imperfections ......................................................................................... 150
10.1.9 Definition of Load Cases ................................................................................................................. 151
10.1.10 Definition of Loads for the Generated Load Cases ....................................................................... 151
10.1.11 Snow/Wind Load Generation......................................................................................................... 152
10.1.12 Generation of Automatic Code Combinations............................................................................... 152
10.2 STRUCTURE ANALYSIS AND RESULT VERIFICATION .............................................................. 153
10.3 ELASTO-PLASTIC ANALYSIS ........................................................................................................... 153
10.3.1 Change of Load Case Definitions.................................................................................................... 153
10.3.2 Structure Analysis............................................................................................................................ 154
10.3.3 Change of Bar Sections for Elasto-Plastic Analysis........................................................................ 154
10.3.4 Structure Analysis and Result Verification ...................................................................................... 155
11. DESIGN OF A BAR STRUCTURE WITH ADDED MASSES........................................................ 156
11.1 DEFINITION OF THE STRUCTURE MODEL ................................................................................... 157
11.2 CALCULATIONS AND RESULT ANALYSIS.................................................................................... 164
12. DEFINITION OF A PUSHOVER ANALYSIS CASE ...................................................................... 167

2 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

12.1 STRUCTURE MODEL DEFINITION .................................................................................................. 168


12.2 DEFINITION OF THE PUSHOVER ANALYSIS CASE ..................................................................... 171
12.3 DEFINITION OF A NON-LINEAR HINGE ......................................................................................... 172
12.4 STRUCTURE ANALYSIS .................................................................................................................... 175
12.5 RESULT ANALYSIS............................................................................................................................. 175
12.6 RESULTS - DIAGRAMS OF PUSHOVER ANALYSIS ...................................................................... 175
12.7 RESULTS – CAPACITY CURVE........................................................................................................ 176
13. RC BEAM DESIGN - ACI CODE (ROBOT STAND-ALONE MODE) ......................................... 177
13.1 CONFIGURATION (PROGRAM PREFERENCES) ............................................................................ 177
13.2 BEAM DESIGN ..................................................................................................................................... 178
14. RC COLUMN DESIGN - ACI CODE (ROBOT STAND-ALONE MODE) ................................... 184
14.1 CONFIGURATION (PROGRAM PREFERENCES) ............................................................................ 184
14.2 COLUMN DESIGN ............................................................................................................................... 185
15. RC FOUNDATION DESIGN - ACI CODE (ROBOT STAND-ALONE MODE) .......................... 191
15.1 CONFIGURATION (PROGRAM PREFERENCES) ............................................................................ 191
15.2 SIMPLE FOOTING DESIGN ................................................................................................................ 192
16. DEFINITION OF A 2D FRAME ........................................................................................................ 197
16.1 STRUCTURE DEFINITION ................................................................................................................. 198
16.1.1 Definition of a Working Language and Codes ................................................................................ 198
16.1.2 Structure Axis Definition ................................................................................................................. 199
16.1.3 Structure Axis Modification ............................................................................................................. 199
16.1.4 Column and Beam Definition .......................................................................................................... 200
16.1.5 Truss Definition ............................................................................................................................... 201
16.1.6 Definition of Releases on the Ends of Diagonals ............................................................................ 206
16.1.7 Support Definition ........................................................................................................................... 206
16.1.8 Load Definition................................................................................................................................ 207
16.1.9 Structure Modification..................................................................................................................... 210
16.1.10 Additional Load Definition ............................................................................................................ 211
16.1.11 Load Combination Definition ........................................................................................................ 212
16.2 STRUCTURE ANALYSIS .................................................................................................................... 213
16.3 ANALYSIS OF RESULTS IN THE GRAPHICAL FORM................................................................... 213
16.4 ANALYSIS OF RESULTS IN THE TABLE FORM ............................................................................ 214
16.5 DETAILED ANALYSIS OF BARS....................................................................................................... 215
16.6 DIMENSION LINES.............................................................................................................................. 216
16.7 CODE PARAMETERS FOR STEEL DESIGN ..................................................................................... 218
16.8 STEEL MEMBER VERIFICATION AND DESIGN ............................................................................ 219
16.9 GROUP DEFINITION, VERIFICATION AND OPTIMIZATION ...................................................... 221
16.10 STRESS ANALYSIS ........................................................................................................................... 223
17. DEFINITION OF AN RC SLAB......................................................................................................... 224
17.1 STRUCTURE DEFINITION ................................................................................................................. 224
17.2 DEFINITION OF SLAB LOADS .......................................................................................................... 230
17.3 MESHING OPTIONS ............................................................................................................................ 233
17.4 DEFINITION OF BEAMS SUPPORTING THE SLAB ....................................................................... 235
17.5 DEFINITION OF THE BEAM SUPPORTING THE ARC-SHAPED SLAB ....................................... 236
17.6 DEFINITION OF CONCENTRATED FORCES................................................................................... 238
17.7 DEFINITION OF LOAD COMBINATIONS ........................................................................................ 239
17.8 STRUCTURE ANALYSIS .................................................................................................................... 240
17.8.1 Results in the Map Form.................................................................................................................. 240
17.8.2 Results in the Table Form................................................................................................................ 241
17.9 REINFORCEMENT DEFINITION ....................................................................................................... 242
17.9.1 Structure Analysis............................................................................................................................ 243
17.9.2 Reinforcement Calculations............................................................................................................. 243
17.9.3 Analysis of Reinforcement Results................................................................................................... 244
17.9.4 Results in the Text Form .................................................................................................................. 245

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 3


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

18. 2D STRUCTURE (MIXED RC AND STEEL STRUCTURE) ......................................................... 247


18.1 STRUCTURE GEOMETRY.................................................................................................................. 248
18.1.1 Section Definition ............................................................................................................................ 248
18.1.2 Bar Definition .................................................................................................................................. 249
18.1.3 Support Definition ........................................................................................................................... 250
18.1.4 Load Definition................................................................................................................................ 250
18.1.5 Definition of Snow/Wind Loads ...................................................................................................... 251
18.1.6 RC Beam Design.............................................................................................................................. 252
18.1.7 RC Column Design .......................................................................................................................... 255
18.1.8 Change of the Structure Geometry and Type................................................................................... 258
18.1.9 Slab Definition................................................................................................................................. 261
18.1.10 Offset Definition ............................................................................................................................ 262
18.1.11 Front Wall Definition .................................................................................................................... 264
18.1.12 Definition of Supports on Wall Edges............................................................................................ 266
18.1.13 Definition of Additional Loads to Be Applied to the Slab.............................................................. 266
18.1.14 Definition of Combinations............................................................................................................ 267
18.1.15 Definition of Meshing Options....................................................................................................... 267
18.2 STRUCTURE ANALYSIS .................................................................................................................... 268
18.3 ANALYSIS OF RESULTS .................................................................................................................... 268
18.4 STRESS ANALYSIS FOR ALL STRUCTURE BARS......................................................................... 270
19. 3D STEEL STRUCTURE (MODAL AND TIME HISTORY ANALYSES)................................... 272
19.1 STRUCTURE GEOMETRY.................................................................................................................. 273
19.2 LOAD DEFINITION.............................................................................................................................. 279
19.3 LOAD COMBINATION DEFINITION ................................................................................................ 282
19.4 STRUCTURE ANALYSIS .................................................................................................................... 284
19.5 ANALYSIS OF RESULTS .................................................................................................................... 284
19.6 MODAL ANALYSIS ............................................................................................................................. 285
19.6.1 Analysis of Vibration Eigenmodes................................................................................................... 286
19.7 TIME HISTORY ANALYSIS................................................................................................................ 287
20. DEFINITION OF AN RC CONTAINER ........................................................................................... 290
20.1 STRUCTURE DEFINITION ................................................................................................................. 291
20.2 LOAD DEFINITION.............................................................................................................................. 302
20.3 DEFINITION OF LOAD COMBINATIONS ........................................................................................ 304
20.4 RESULT ANALYSIS............................................................................................................................. 305
20.5 REINFORCEMENT CALCULATIONS................................................................................................ 306
20.6 MESH REFINEMENT ........................................................................................................................... 308
21. DEFINITION OF A STEEL CONTAINER ....................................................................................... 311
21.1 STRUCTURE DEFINITION ................................................................................................................. 311
21.2 LOAD DEFINITION.............................................................................................................................. 312
21.3 DEFINITION OF LOAD COMBINATIONS ........................................................................................ 316
21.4 RESULT ANALYSIS............................................................................................................................. 317
22. DEFINITION OF A SOLID / THIN-WALLED SECTION.............................................................. 320
22.1 SOLID SECTION................................................................................................................................... 320
22.2 THIN-WALLED SECTION................................................................................................................... 322

4 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

NOTE: In the examples below the following rule has been assumed to indicate definition of
the beginning and end of a structure bar:
for example, (0,0,6) (8,0,6) means that a bar beginning is positioned at a node with
the coordinates as follows x = 0.0, y = 0.0 and z = 6.0 and a bar end - at a node with
the coordinates as follows x = 8.0, y = 0.0 and z = 6.0. The separator (set in the
Windows operating system) which separates successive coordinates is in this case
a comma ‘,‘.

1. 3D Frame (with the Use of the Robot Millennium


Layouts)
This example presents definition, analysis and design of a simple steel 3D frame illustrated in the
figure below.
Data units: (ft) and (kip).

Four load cases have been assigned to each of the structure frames and three of them are displayed
in the drawings below.

LOAD CASE 2 LOAD CASE 3 LOAD CASE 4

The following rules apply during structure definition:


• any icon symbol means that the relevant icon is pressed with the left mouse button,
• ( x ) stands for selection of the ‘x’ option in the dialog box or entering the ‘x’ value,
• LMC and RMC - abbreviations for the Left Mouse button Click and the Right Mouse button Click.

To run structure definition start the Robot program (press the appropriate icon or select the command
from the taskbar). The vignette window (described in chapter 2.1 of the manual) will be displayed on

the screen and the last but one icon in the first row (Frame 3D Design) should be
selected.

NOTE: The American section database (AISC) has been used in this example.

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 5


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

1.1 Structure Model Definition

PERFORMED OPERATION DESCRIPTION

Selects the BARS layout from the list of available Robot


Millennium layouts.
Structure Model/Bars
LMC on the Bar Type field and select Selects bar properties. The section from the American
Column section database (AISC) has been used.
LMC on the Section field and select Note: If the W 14x211 section is not available on the list,

(W 14x211) one should press the ( ) button located beside the
Section field and add this section to the active section
list in the New section dialog box

LMC on the Beginning field Starts definition of bars in the structure (structure columns).
(background color changes to green)

Enter the following points in the Defines two columns of the frame.
Beginning and End field.
(0,0,0) (0,0,10) Add
(20,0,0) (20,0,10)
Add

LMC on the Bar Type field in the Starts definition of a beam and selects its properties.
Bars dialog box and select Beam The section from the American section database (AISC) has
LMC on the Section field and select been used.
(W 12x190) Note: If the W 12x190 section is not available on the list,

one should press the ( ) button located beside the
Section field and add this section to the active section
list in the New section dialog box

LMC on the Beginning field Starts definition of a beam in the structure.


(background color changes to green)

Enter the following points in the Defines a beam.


Beginning and End field.
(0,0,10) (20,0,10),
Add

LMC on the field for selection of the Selects the Robot Millennium layout which allows support
Robot Millennium program layouts definition.
Structure Model/Supports

In the Supports dialog box, LMC on Selects structure nodes for which supports will be defined.
the Current Selection field (cursor is
blinking in the field)

Switch to the graphic viewer; Selected nodes 1 and 3 will be entered to the Current
pressing the left mouse button select Selection field.
with the window all lower column
nodes

From the Supports dialog box select Selects the support type.
the fixed support icon (the icon will
be highlighted)

6 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Apply Selected support type will be assigned to chosen structure


nodes; the defined structure is displayed on the drawing
below.

LMC on the field for the selection of Selection of the initial Robot Millennium program layout.
the Robot Millennium program Note: If the structure is not visible in the graphic viewer,
layout
Structure Model/Start press the Zoom All icon.

CTRL+A Selects all bars.

Edit / Edit / Vertical Mirror Mirrors selected bars.

Graphically locate the vertical Performs the axial symmetry of selected bars and closes
symmetry axis in the place of the the Vertical Mirror dialog box.
right column (x = 20), LMC, Close

LMC on the box for selection of the Selects the Robot Millennium program layout allowing for
Robot Millennium layout the structure load definition.
Structure Model/Loads, press
to show the whole structure

LMC on the New button located in Defines a dead load (self-weight) with a standard name
the Load Types dialog box DL1.

LMC on the Nature field Selects the type of load case wind.
(Wind)

LMC on the New button Defines two cases of wind load with the standard names:
LMC on the New button WIND1 and WIND2

LMC on the Nature field Selects the type of load case live.
(Live)

LMC on the New button Defines a live load with a standard name LL1.

The self-weight load was automatically applied in the first


row to all structure bars (in the “Z” direction).

LMC on the second field in the Case Defines loads for the second load case.
nd
column, select the 2 load case
WIND1 from the list

LMC on the field in the Load Type Selects the load type.
column, select (nodal force) as
a load type

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 7


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

LMC on the field in the List column, Selects nodes to which a nodal force load will be applied.
select the upper node of the left
column (no. 2) in a graphic way

LMC on the field in the "FX=" column Selects the direction and value of the force load.
and enter the value: (50.0)

LMC on the third field in the Case Defines loads for the third load case.
rd
column, select the 3 load case
WIND2 from the list

LMC on the field in the Load Type Selects the load type.
column, select the (uniform) load

LMC on the field in the List column, Selects bars to which the uniform load will be applied.
select graphically the right edge
column (no.4)
LMC on the field in the "PX=" column Selects the direction and value of the uniform load.
and enter the value: (-10.0)

LMC on the fourth field in the Case Defines loads for the fourth load case.
th
column, select the 4 load case LL1
from the list

LMC on the field in the Load Type Selects the load type.
column, select the (uniform) load

LMC on the field in the List column, Selects bars to which the uniform load will be applied.
select graphically both beam spans
(no. 3 and 5)

LMC on the field in the "PZ=" column Selects the direction and value of the uniform load.
and enter the value: (-2.0) Note: 2 bars can be selected simultaneously by means of
window or by indicating successive bars with CTRL
button pressed.
LMC in the View viewer

CTRL + A Selects all structure bars.

While the graphic viewer with the Opens the Translation dialog box.
structure model is active, select Edit /
Edit / Translate

LMC on the field (dX, dY, dZ), Defines the translation vector.
(0,24,0)

LMC on the Number of Repetitions Defines the number of repetitions for performed translation
field operations.
(1)

Execute, Close Translates the column and closes the Translation dialog
box (proceed to the next step to see changes).
View / Projection / 3d xyz Selects the isometric structure view (see the drawing
below).

LMC on the box for selection of the Selects the Robot Millennium layout which allows definition
Robot Millennium program layout of the bars.
Structure Model/Bars

8 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

LMC on the Bar Type field and Selects bar properties. The section from the American
select: Beam section database (AISC) has been used.
LMC on the Section field and select
(W 14x211)

LMC on the Beginning field Starts definition of bars in the structure.


(background color changes to green)

Enter the following points in the Defines a beam between the 6 and 12 nodes in
Beginning and End field. the structure.
(40,0,10) (40,24,10), Add

Selects the SECTIONS AND MATERIALS layout from the


list of available Robot Millennium layouts.
Structure Model/
Sections and Materials

Opens the New Section dialog box.


in the Section dialog box

Selection of the angle family, Defines a new section. The section from the American
in the Section field selection of the section database (AISC) has been used.
(L 4x4x0,25) section
Add, Close

Selects the BARS layout from the list of available Robot


Millennium layouts.
Structure Model/ Bars

LMC in the Bar Type field and select: Selects bar properties.
Simple bar
LMC on the Section field and select
(L 4x4x0.25)

LMC on the Beginning field Bracing definition.


(background color changes to green)
(40,0,10) (40,24,0), Add
(40,24,10) (40,0,0), Add

LMC on the box for selection of the Selects the initial layout of the Robot Millennium program.
Robot Millennium program layouts
Structure Model / Start

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 9


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

LMC on the View edit viewer;


Select three recently defined bars
(beam and bracing) - while the CTRL
key is pressed LMC on three bars

Edit / Edit / Translate Opens the Translation dialog box.

LMC on the field (dX, dY, dZ), Defines the translation vector.
(-20,0,0)

LMC on the Number of Repetitions Defines the number of repetitions for performed translation
(2) operations.

Execute, Close Column translation; closes the Translation dialog box.

1.2 Structure Analysis

Starts calculations for the defined structure

LMC on the box for selection of the The RESULTS layout of the Robot Millennium program
Robot Millennium program layouts opens. The screen is divided into three parts: a graphic
Results/Results viewer containing the structure model, the Diagrams dialog
box and a table with reaction values.

1.3 Result Analysis

Displays results for the fourth load case.


Select 4: LL1
Select the Deformation tab from the Displays structure deformation for the selected load case.
Diagrams dialog box
Turn on the Deformation option

Apply Displays structure deformation (see the drawing below).


In a similar way, diagrams that exhibit other values available
from the Diagrams dialog box can be viewed.

Turn off the Deformation option in


the Diagrams dialog box,
Apply

10 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

LMC in the Reactions table on the Selects the whole column FZ.
field with the name of FZ

Format / Alignment / Centered and Edits result presentation for the Fz force.
Format / Font / Bold

RMC on the Reactions table Calls up the context menu.

Table Columns Selects the Table Columns option and opens the dialog box

LMC on the Supports tab, select (Scroll to the left to reach the Supports tab). An additional
the Support Code option, OK column with codes defined for the structure supports appears.

1.4 Steel Design


Code: LRFD
LMC on the box for the selection of Starts steel member design. The screen will be divided into
the Robot Millennium program three parts: a graphic viewer containing the structure model,
layouts the Definitions dialog box and the Calculations dialog box.
Structure Design / Steel/Aluminum
Design

LMC on the List button in Opens the Member Selection dialog box.
the Member Verification row from the
Calculations dialog box

Enter 1to10 in the field located above Selects members for verification.
the Previous button, Close

LMC on the Load Case Selection Opens the Load Case Selection dialog box.
button in Calculations dialog box

LMC on the All button, Close Selects all load cases.

LMC on the Calculations button Starts verification of selected structure members;


the Member Verification dialog box shown below will be
displayed on the screen.

LMC on the row containing simplified Opens the Simplified Results – LRFD dialog box for the
results for member No. 3 selected member.

LMC on the Simplified Results tab Displays design results for member No. 4 (see the dialog
box presented below).

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 11


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Close Results - Member


Verification and Results dialog
boxes

1.5 Design of Steel Connections


Code: Eurocode 3
LMC the field of the Robot Design of steel connections in a structure starts. The
Millennium program layout selection monitor screen will be divided into two parts: the Object
Structure design / Connections Inspector dialog box (Steel Connections) and the graphical
viewer; at the bottom of the graphical viewer there are three
tabs: Scheme, 3D View and Structure.

Move on to the Structure tab and The structure will be presented as projected on the zx plane
while having the graphical field (y coordinate is assumed to equal 0).
displaying structure view active
(highlighted), select from the menu:
View / Projection / zx

Select the utmost left column and the Selection of bars for which the connection will be verified.
left span of the beam - while The selected bars are pointed out with arrows in the figure
pressing the CTRL button, click the below.
left mouse button on the mentioned
bars

12 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Connections / New Connection for A connection is defined between the selected bars. The
Selected Bars Connection Definition dialog box starts to display several
tabs.

Select the Welds option located in Selection of the type of the defined steel connection
the Connection Definition dialog
box (the Sections tab),
Apply, OK

Connections / Calculations Opening the Connection calculations dialog box

LMC the List field in the Load cases Definition of load cases considered during the connection
field verification

Enter here (1to4) Selection of all the load cases

LMC the Calculations button Verification of the connection starts; short results are
presented in the Object Inspector dialog box and a
detailed calculation note is displayed on the Results tab (this
tab is accessible only after calculations of the connection
are performed).

1.6 Stress Analysis


LMC the field of the Robot Starts structure stress analysis. The screen will be
Millennium program layout divided into three parts: graphical viewer presenting
selection a structure model, the Stress Analysis dialog box and
Results / Stress Analysis - the Stress Analysis - structure result table.
structure

From the top selection toolbar Selects the second load case.
choose the second load case 2:
WIND1

On the Diagrams tab located in the Starts calculations and presents stress values
Stress Analysis - structure dialog on structure bars (the table displays values of the
box select the Max option from the appropriate stresses).
Mises field
On the Maps - Deformation tab
select the Deformation option
Apply

While in the window presenting the Selects the axonometric structure view.
structure view - View / Projection /
3d xyz

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 13


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Move to the Stress Analysis - Sets the 3D view that allows presenting the structure
structure table together with shapes of the sections and detailed stress
View / Dynamic View 3D maps on these sections (the defined structure with the
selected stresses is shown in the figure below).

14 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

2. 2D Frame (without the Use of the Robot Millennium


Layouts)
This example is used to show the definition, analysis and design of a simple 2D frame illustrated in
the figure below. The frame is made of the RC frame and the truss generated by using the library
of typical structures available in the Robot Millennium program.

Data units: (ft) and (kip).

Four out of five load cases applied to the structure are displayed in the drawing below.

LOAD CASE 2 LOAD CASE 3

LOAD CASE 4 LOAD CASE 5

The following rules will apply during structure definition:


• any icon symbol means that the relevant icon is pressed with the left mouse button,
• ( x ) stands for selection of the ‘x’ option in the dialog box or entering the ‘x’ value,
• LMC and RMC - abbreviations for the Left Mouse button Click and the Right Mouse button Click.

To run structure definition start the Robot Millennium program (press the appropriate icon or select
the command from the taskbar). The vignette window (described in the chapter 2.1 of the manual) will

be displayed on the screen and the first icon (2D Frame Design ) should be selected.

NOTE: The American section database (AISC) has been used in this example.

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 15


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

2.1 Structure Model Definition

PERFORMED OPERATION DESCRIPTION

Starts definition of structural axes. The Structural Axis


dialog box appears on the screen.
On the X tab: Defines vertical axis parameters.
Position: (0)
Number of repetitions: (4)
Distance: (18)
Numbering: (1, 2, 3 ...)

LMC on the Insert button Vertical axes have been defined and will be presented in
the Set of Created Axis field.

LMC on the Z tab Starts definition of horizontal axis parameters.

On the Z tab: Defines horizontal axis parameters.


Position: (0)
Number of Repetitions: (3)
Distance: (9)
Numbering: (A, B, C ...)

LMC on the Insert button Horizontal axes have been defined and will be presented in
the Set Of Created Axes field.

Apply, Close Creates defined structural axes and closes the Structural
Axes dialog box. Structural axes will be displayed on the
screen, as on the figure below.

16 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

2.1.1 Structure Bar Definition

Opens the Sections dialog box.

Opens the New Section dialog box.

Selection of the I family, Defines a new section. The section from the American
in the Section field selection of the section database (AISC) has been used.
(W 8x10) section
Add

LMC in the Section Type field, Defines an RC beam section.


selection of the RC beam option, in
the Label field enter B18x24
in fields b = (18) in., h = (24) in.
Add, Close

Close Closes the Sections dialog box.

Opens the Bars dialog box.

LMC on the Bar Type field and select Selects bar properties.
RC Column
LMC on the Section field and select
the type: (C18x18)

LMC on the Beginning field Starts definition of bars in the structure (structure columns).
(background color changes to green)

Enter the following points in the Defines the first two bars located on structural axis
Beginning and End field. number 1.
(0,0) (0,9), Add
(0,9) (0,18), Add

RMC on any point in the viewer with Opens context menu and switches to selection mode.
the structure view and choose Select The mouse cursor changes its shape to “hand”.
command from the context menu

CTRL+A Selects all bars. (Remember to activate the View window


first.)

Edit / Edit / Translate Opens the Translation dialog box.

LMC on the field (dX,dZ), Defines the translation vector and numbering increment
(18,0) for nodes and bars.
LMC on the fields: Numbering
Increment Nodes and Numbering
Increment Elements
(1) (1)

LMC on the Number of Repetitions Defines the number of repetitions for performed translation
field operations.
(4)

Execute, Close Column translation; closes the Translation dialog box.

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 17


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

LMC on the Bar Type field in the Starts definition of beams in the structure and selects their
Bars dialog box and select RC Beam properties.
LMC on the Section field and select
(B18x24)

LMC on the Beginning field Starts definition of bars in the structure.


(background color changes to green)

(0,9) (18,9), Add Defines the RC beam located on the structural axis B.
(18,9) (36,9), Add
(36,9) (54,9), Add
(54,9) (72,9), Add

Close Closes the Bars dialog box.

View / Display Opens the Display dialog box.

Sections tab Option allows for the display of section shapes for the
Section - shape (turn on that box), defined structure bars. Bars presented on the figure below
Apply will be displayed on the screen.

2.1.2 Library Structure Definition

View / Display Opens the Display dialog box

Structure tab
Turn on the Node Numbers option,
Apply, OK

Opens the Typical Structures dialog box and starts


definition of a library structure.

18 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

LMC (double-click) on the icon Selects a triangular truss of type 1. The Merge Structure
dialog box appears and truss parameters can be defined.

(first icon in the last row)

LMC on the Length L field on the Defines the truss length (it can also be defined graphically in
Dimensions tab the graphic viewer).
(72)

LMC on the Height H field Defines the truss height (it can also be defined graphically in
(9) the graphic viewer).

LMC on the Number of Fields field Defines the number of fields into which the truss will be
(12) divided.

LMC on the Sections tab; Assigns the section to the truss bars.
To all truss bars (Upper and Lower
Chords, Diagonals, Posts) assign (W
8x10)

LMC on the Insert tab

LMC on the Insertion Point field, Defines the truss beginning node.
select the node number 3 of the
following coordinates (0,0,18)

Apply, OK Locates the defined structure in the appropriate place and


closes the Merge Structure dialog box. The defined
structure is presented on the drawing below.

View / Display Opens the Display dialog box.

Structure tab
Turn off the Node Numbers option
Others tab
Turn off the Structural Axis option,
Apply, OK

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 19


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Geometry / Releases Opens the Releases dialog box.

LMC on the Pinned-Fixed release Chooses the release type that will be assigned to a truss
type bar.

LMC on the Current selection field, Selects the truss bar; ATTENTION: take note of the arrows
switch to the graphic viewer and that appear on the highlighted truss bar – while indicating
indicate the highest post of the truss the bar the arrows should be pointed up (the direction of the
(the bar between the nodes 9 and release is significant: at the first node the pinned connection
29) remains, whereas at the second one – the fixed connection
is defined)

Close Closes the Releases dialog box.

2.1.3 Support Definition


Opens the Supports dialog box.

LMC on the Current Selection field Selects structure nodes in which supports will be defined.
on the Nodal tab (the cursor should
be blinking in that field)

Switch to the graphic viewer by Selected nodes: 1to13by3 will be entered to the Current
pressing the left mouse button; Selection field.
select all lower column nodes with
the window

In the Supports dialog box select the Selects the support type.
fixed support icon (the support will be
highlighted)

Apply, Close Selected support type will be assigned to selected structure


nodes, closes the Supports dialog box.

2.1.4 Load Case Definition


Opens the Load Types dialog box.

LMC on the New button Defines a dead load (self-weight) with a standard name
DL1.

LMC on the Nature field Selects the load nature: live.


(Live)

LMC on the New button Defines two live load cases with standard names LL1
LMC on the New button and LL2.

LMC on the Nature field Selects the load case nature: wind.
(Wind)

LMC on the New button Defines a wind load case with a standard name WIND1.

20 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

LMC on the Nature field Selects the load case nature: snow.
(Snow)

LMC on the New button, Close Defines a snow load case with a standard name SN1
and closes the Load Types dialog box.

2.1.5 Definition of Loads for Generated Cases


Loads / Load Table Opens a table for loads acting in defined load cases.

, Decreases the table size so that the load graphic definition


place the table in the lower part of is possible. (You can use Windows/Align Windows after the
the screen in such a way so that it is loads window is resized.)
adjusted to its width and the defined
structure model is displayed.

Dead Load (direction “-Z”) automatically applied to all


structure bars.

LMC on the second field in the Case Defines loads for the second load case.
nd
column, select the 2 load case LL1
from the list

LMC on the field in the Load Type Selects the load type.
column, select the (uniform) load

LMC on the field in the List column, Selects bars to which the uniform load will be applied.
select all the concrete beams in the
graphic viewer (bars 11to14)

LMC on the field in the "PZ=" column Selects the direction and sign of the uniform load.
and enter the value: (-5)

LMC on the next field in the Case Defines loads for the third load case.
rd
column, select the 3 load case LL2
from the list

LMC on the Load Type column, Selects the load type.


select the (trapezoidal) load

LMC on the field in the List column, Selects bars to which the trapezoidal load will be applied.
select graphically in the graphic
viewer the first left span of the
concrete beam (bar 11)

LMC on the field in the "PZ1=" Selects the direction and sign of the trapezoidal load
column and enter the value: (-4)
LMC on the X2 field and enter value
(1.0)
LMC on the field in the "PZ2="
column and enter the value: (-6)

LMC on the next field in the Case Defines loads for the fourth load case.
th
column, select the 4 load case
WIND1 from the list

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 21


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

LMC on the field in the Load Type Selects the load type.
column, select the (uniform) load

LMC on the field in the List column, Selects bars to which the uniform load will be applied.
Select graphically in the graphic
viewer the left edge column (bars 1
and 2)

LMC on the field in the "PX=" column Selects the direction and value of the uniform load.
and enter the value: (1.0)

LMC on the field in the Case column, Defines loads for the fifth load case.
th
select the 5 load case SN1 from the
list

LMC on the field in the Load Type Selects the load type.
column, select (nodal forces) as
a load type

LMC on the field in the List column, Selects nodes to which the nodal force load will be applied.
select graphically in the graphic
viewer the nodes on the upper truss
chords (without the edge nodes)
(nodes 24to34)

LMC on the field in the "FZ=" column Selects the direction and the load value.
and enter the value: (-0.25)

Close the Load table

2.2 Structure Analysis

Tools / Job Preferences Opens the Job Preferences dialog box

Units and Formats / Other Selects the option that enables defining a number of
decimal places for selected quantities.

Increase of the number of decimal Increases the number of decimal places for linear
places for linear displacements to 4 displacements to 4.

OK Accepts assumed parameters and closes the Job


Preferences dialog box

Starts calculations for the defined structure.

LMC in the Robot program layout The RESULTS layout of the Robot Millennium program
selection, Results / Results opens. The screen will be divided into three parts (as shown
in the drawing below): a graphic field containing the
structure model, the Diagrams dialog box and a table with
reaction values.

22 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

2.3 Result Analysis


LMC Reactions table. Displays the results for the second load case.

Select 2: LL1

Turn on the My Moment option on Selects the bending moment My for presentation.
the NTM tab in the Diagrams dialog
box

Apply Displays a diagram of the bending moment for structure


bars (see the drawing below). In a similar way, diagrams
that exhibit other values available from the Diagrams dialog
box can be displayed.

Turn off the My Moment option in the


Diagrams dialog box,
Apply

Opens a table containing structure displacements.

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 23


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

LMC on the Global Extremes tab in Displays the maximum and minimum displacements
the Displacements table obtained in structure nodes (see the drawing below).

LMC on the Values tab

RMC on the Displacements table Calls up the context menu.

Table Columns Selects the Table Columns option and opens the dialog box.

LMC on the General tab, select the Two additional columns containing node coordinates
Coordinates option, OK button appear.

Close the Displacements table

2.4 RC Beam Design with Torsion Considered


NOTE: The code calculations are performed according to British code BS 8110.

RMC on the graphic viewer and Selects the beams for design.
choose the Select option from the
context menu; select all RC beams
from the window

Analysis / Design of RC Structure Runs a module that allows for concrete beam design. Data
Elements / RC Beam Design on the beam together with the static analysis results will be
loaded to this module.

Simple Cases Selects the Simple Cases option in the Load Selection
OK dialog box.

Starts the concrete beam design and accepts the default


values of the calculation options.
LMC the Reinforcement Pattern and
the Calculation Options fields and
selection of the Standard options
LMC on the Calculations button in
the Calculation Option Set dialog
box

Analysis / Calculation Options Opens the Calculation Options dialog box.

24 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

On the General tab press the Opens the Advanced Options dialog box, includes
Advanced button and next, select a torsional moment in calculations.
the Torsion taken into account Closes the Advanced Options dialog box. Closes the
option, OK, OK Calculation Options dialog box.

LMC on the box for selection of the Graphic and tabulated presentation of obtained results
Robot Millennium program layouts (cross section force diagrams for various limit states and
Layout: RC Beams / Beam - diagrams of reinforcement area along the beam’s length).
Results

RC Beams / Beam - Reinforcement Graphic and tabulated presentation of reinforcement in the


beam (see the drawing below).

Results / Drawings Displays a working drawing of the first span of the designed
beam (runs the FINAL DRAWINGS layout).

Beam - Reinforcement Returns to the BEAM - REINFORCEMENT layout

Results / Calculation Note Opens the Calculation Note dialog box where one can
OK select the components of the calculation note and starts the
Robot Millennium program editor for presentation of data
and results for the beam.

Close the editor with the calculation


note

2.5 RC Column Design


NOTE: The code calculations are done according to British code BS 8110.

Selects the START layout from the list of available layouts


Structure Model / Start of the Robot Millennium program

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 25


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

While in the graphical viewer RMC Selects the column that will undergo design
and choose the Select option; select
with the window the outermost
bottom left column (bar 1)

Analysis / Design of RC Structure Runs module that enables RC column design. Data on the
Elements / RC Column Design column together with the static analysis results will be
loaded to this module.

Simple cases, Selects the Simple cases option in the Load Selection
OK dialog box.

Runs RC column design and accepts the default values of


the calculation options
LMC the Calculations button in the
Calculation Option Set dialog box

LMC the field for selection of the The screen presents surfaces (curves) of the interactions N-
Robot Millennium program layout M, My-Mz.
RC Columns / Column - Results

Open the context menu by means of Opens the Intersection dialog box.
RMC in the right graphical viewer,
select the Governing case option

From the list of available Presents the column section with the following elements
combinations located on the left side marked on it: neutral axis, compressive and tensile zones
of the dialog box select the first together with the appropriate safety factors for the selected
combination from the top combination.

26 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Close Closes the Intersection dialog box

LMC the field for selection of the Presents the obtained reinforcement in the column
Robot Millennium program layout graphically and in the form of a table (see the drawing
RC Columns / Column - below)
Reinforcement

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 27


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

2.6 Design of RC Members


Code BS 8110
The START layout is selected from among those provided
Structure model / Start by the Robot Millennium program

Analysis / Design of RC Structure The Calculations According to BS 8110 dialog box is


Elements / RC Member Design / opened
Calculations

Introduce the list of bars 1to14 in the Selection of members that will undergo the design process
Calculations field (with the Design
option active)

Introduce the list of the load cases Selection of all load cases
(1to5) applied to the structure and
used during its design into the Lists
of cases field

LMC the ULS option in the Design Selection of the limit state that will set the requirements to
simple cases according to field be verified during member design

For the Calculate option for beams Determination of the parameters of searching for the
assume the following parameters: theoretical (required) area of reinforcement for the selected
in (11) points members of the structure

LMC the Calculate button Calculations of the theoretical (required) area of


reinforcement for the selected members of the structure and
the adopted calculation parameters are started.

Close in the RC Member Display of a window containing calculation warnings and


Calulations: Report dialog box errors concerning member theoretical (required)
reinforcement

Close the Calculations according


to BS 8110 dialog box

Results / Reinforcement / Opens the Results for required member reinforcement table
RC Member Reinforcement in which calculation results of theoretical (required)
reinforcement for selected RC member sections will be
displayed

Close the Results for required


member reinforcement table

28 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

3. Concrete Slab
This example will demonstrate step-by-step how the user can define and analyze a simple slab with
an opening.

Data units: (m) and (kN).

A slab with an opening will be generated and analyzed. The slab will consist of concrete elements.
All the steps required will be presented. Three load cases will be defined. Five structure modes will
also be found.

The following rules will apply during structure definition:


• any icon symbol means that the relevant icon is pressed with the left mouse button,
• ( x ) stands for selection of the ‘x’ option in the dialog box or entering the ‘x’ value,
• LMC and RMC - abbreviations for the Left Mouse button Click and the Right Mouse button Click.

To run structure definition start the Robot Millennium program (press the appropriate icon or select
the command from the taskbar). The vignette window (described in the chapter 2.1 of the manual) will
be displayed on the screen and the first icon in the second row (Plate Design) should be selected.

3.1 Structure Model Definition

3.1.1 Contour Definition


PERFORMED OPERATION DESCRIPTION

View / Grid / Grid Step Definition Opens the Grid Step Definition dialog box.

Dx = Dy =1.0 Defines grid step on the screen (equal in both directions)

Apply, Close Accepts the defined parameters and closes the Grid Step
Definition dialog box.

Selects polyline to define a rectangle.

LMC on Polyline option in Definition Selects polyline to define a slab contour.


Method

Using mouse select the following Defines a rectangle contour.


points in the graphical window:
(-7, -5)
(-7, 5)
(7, 5)
(7, -5)
(-7, -5)

(-4, 2) (-4, 0) (-1, 0) (-1, 2) (-4, 2) Defines a rectangle contour by entering four rectangle
vertexes and the fifth point to make a closure. It models
dimensions of an opening in the slab.

Close Closes Polyline - contour dialog box.

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 29


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

3.1.2 Mesh Definition

Tools / Job Preferences / Meshing Opens the window of the mesh options.
Options

In the Meshing Type field select: Selects user defined meshing type.
User, LMC Modification button

LMC in Available Meshing Methods / Selects Delaunay’s option.


Delaunay

Mesh Generation/Division 1: (7) Defines the size of the mesh size.

OK Accepts changes in the Meshing Options dialog box.

OK Accepts changes in the Job Preferences dialog box.

3.1.3 Slab Properties

Opens window where the slab thickness will be defined.

Defines a new FE thickness.

On the Homogenuous tab in the Th= Defines slab thickness.


field type the value (25)

In the Material: field select Selects CONCRETE.


( CONCR )

Add, Close Adds this new thickness: TH25 and closes the New
thickness dialog box.

Close Closes the FE Thickness dialog box.

30 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

3.1.4 Opening Properties

Selects Panels icon option to define the plate.

LMC Contour Type: Opening Defines the opening contour.

LMC in Creation with/Internal Point: Creates a contour for the hole. Select a point inside the
LMC at (-3, 1) in the View graphical opening by clicking inside the opening defined above, for
window example at (-3,1) point. And the contour appears on the
opening.

LMC Contour Type: Panel Defines the panel around the opening.

LMC Properties/Thickness: Selects thickness type TH25 and reinforcement type.


Select: TH25
LMC Properties / Reinforcement:
Select: Direction X

LMC in Creation with / Internal Creates a contour for the panel. Select a point inside the
Point: panel by clicking outside of the opening defined above but
LMC at (0, 0) in the View graphical inside the panel rectangle, for example at (0,0) point. And
window the contour appears around the panel.

Close Closes panel definition.

3.1.5 Support Definition

Define 4 additional nodes:


no. 5: (-6, -4)
no. 6. (-6, 4)
no. 7 (6, 4)
no. 8 (6, -4)

Analysis / Calculation Model / Generates a finite element mesh according to the adopted
Generation parameters of mesh generation

Selects Supports icon option to define the supports for the


slab.

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 31


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Defines a new support type

Advanced on the Rigid tab Opens the Support Definition – Advanced dialog box to
define a support determined by means of dimensions of the
column cross-section

Column Selects the support type - column

Rectangular Defines the column type (rectangular) and dimensions of the


b = 25, h = 25 column cross-section.

OK Closes the Support Definition – Advanced dialog box

In the Label field enter Specifies name of the defined support type
Column25x25,
set all the directions (UZ, RX, RY)
as fixed

Add and Close Adds the new support type (column25x25) to the list of
available support types and closes the Support Definition
dialog box

LMC on column25x25 Selects type of the support.

LMC on Current Selection / Point / Selects the nodes at which supports will be defined – see
Node the figure below
LMC in the field
LMC on points 5, 6, 7, 8

Apply, Close Defines supports in the structure and closes the Supports
dialog box

3.1.6 Load Case Definition

Opens the Load Cases dialog box.

LMC on the New button Defines a dead load (self-weight) with a standard name
DL1.

32 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

LMC on the Nature field Selects the load nature: live.


(Live)

LMC on the New button Defines two live load cases with standard names LL1 and
LMC on the New button, Close LL2 and closes Load cases dialog box.

3.1.7 Definition of Loads for Generated Cases

LMC on LL1 Selects load case Live Load 1.

Selects Load Definition.

Select the Surface Tab Selects Uniform Planar Load on Contour.

Load Parameters, Z: (-0.5) Defines the load intensity.

LMC Contour Definition Defines a rectangle contour on which the load will be
applied.

Define the following points


(-7, 1.5)
(-4, 1.5)
(-4, 0)
(-7, 0)

LMC on Add button at the very


bottom of the Uniform Planar Load
dialog box

LMC on the Apply To field Selects the panel.


(1)

LMC on Apply button

LMC on LL2 Selects load case Live Load 2.

Select the Surface Tab Selects Linear Load 2p.

Values: P1, P2 Defines the load intensity (P1 and P2) on the two ends of
Z: (-0.8, -0.8) the load line segment and their coordinates (A and B).

Point Coordinates
A: (1, -5)
B: (1, 5)

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 33


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

LMC Add

Close Closes the Load Definition dialog box

3.1.8 Display of Generated Load Cases

View / Projection / 3D xyz Selects isometric view.

View / Display / Loads tab

LMC Symbols option Selects Symbols checkbox

View / Display / Finite Elements tab Moves on to the Finite Elements tab in the Display dialog
box

LMC on the options: Finite elements, Switches off the options of structure element display
Numbers and panel description

Apply, OK

LMC on LL2 Selects load case Live Load 2

LMC on LL1 Selects load case Live Load 1

34 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

3.2 Structure Analysis / Results (Maps on Panels Cuts)

Starts calculations of the defned structure

LMC in the Robot program layout Opens the RESULTS / RESULTS - MAPS layout of the
selection, Results / Results - maps Robot Millennium program.

LMC on LL1 Selects load case Live Load 1.

LMC on the displacements - u, w Selection of the displacement to be presented


option in the Maps dialog box

Go to the Parameters tab in the Selection of the layer for which the determined
Maps dialog box and select the displacements will be presented
middle in the Layer selection field

Apply

Go to the Detailed tab in the Maps


dialog box and switch off the
presentation of displacements for the
plate, Apply

Structure Model / Geometry Select the initial layout of the Robot Millennium program

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 35


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Results / Panel Cuts Opens the Panel Cuts dialog box that allows creating
diagrams of internal forces and displacements in planar
finite elements

LMC the Moments - M xx option on Selects the Mxx moment diagram for presentation
the Detailed tab

On the Definition tab in the Panel Selects the method of cut plane definition
Cuts dialog box select the Parallel to
axis -Y option, enter the coordinates:
(1.00, -5.00) into the field below

Move to the Parameters tab and Selects the layer for which the displacements in a given cut
afterwards, select the middle option will be presented
in the Layer selection field

On the Diagrams tab select the Selects the manner of diagram presentation on structure
following options: cuts
Horizontal in the Diagram
descriptions field, fence in the Filling
field and normal in the Diagram
position field

Apply Switches on presentation of displacements on the panel


cuts (the drawing below). The drawing below presents the
structure as defined so far.

Using the option rotate the plate to view the diagram (which
is initially shown under the plate).

Move to the Cuts tab and turn off Turns off display of the diagram on the cut through the slab.
display of the diagram in the defined
cut (√ symbol will disappear)

Apply, Close Turns off display of displacements in the panel cut and
closes the Panel Cuts dialog box.

36 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

3.3 Calculations of the Required (Theoretical) Reinforcement Area


Code: BS 8110
LMC the field allowing one to select The user goes to the layout of the Robot Millennium
Robot program layouts and select: program allowing one to determine the theoretical (required)
RC Slabs / Slabs - required reinforcement area for the defined slab. The screen will be
reinforcement divided into three parts: the graphical viewer with the
structure model and two dialog boxes: Plate and shell
reinforcement and Reinforcements.

LMC on the ULS field in the List of Calculation of the theoretical (required) reinforcement area
cases panel and introduce 1to3 in will be carried out for the Ultimate Limit State with all the
the Plate and Shell Reinforcement load cases applied to the slab considered.
dialog box

LMC the Method field and select the Selection of the analytical method of calculating the
analytical method reinforcement area

Turn on the option: Reduction of If this option is turned on, it means that for slab elements
forces (at supports or above supported at point (e.g. by means of the column support),
columns) values of moments and stresses near the supported points
are substituted for the average value from the vicinity of
these supports/columns

LMC the Calculate button in the Calculations of the theoretical (required) reinforcement area
Plate and shell reinforcement for the defined slab (panel no. 1) are started
dialog box

Once the calculations are finished, Selection of the quantities to be presented


LMC the Area A Y[-] option in the
Reinforcements dialog box

Go to the Scale tab and select Selection of the color palette to be used during the
the 256 colors option in the Color presentation of reinforcement maps
palette field

LMC the Apply button in the Presentation of the reinforcement area for the selected area
Reinforcements dialog box and the selected direction (the map of the reinforcement
area is shown in the figure below)

Make the Area A Y[-] option inactive The reinforcement maps presentation is made inactive
(the Reinforcements dialog box)

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 37


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Opening the table presenting the results obtained from the


calculations of the theoretical (required) reinforcement
areas for the slab

RMC while the cursor is positioned Displays the context menu on the screen
within the Reinforcement Areas table

Table Columns Opens the Reinforcement Areas dialog box

Switch on two options in the Selects the quantities to be presented in the table
Required reinforcement field:
Spacing e X[-]
Spacing e X[+]

OK Closes the Reinforcement Areas dialog box

Go to the Global extremes tab in the Presentation of the global extremes on the surface and
Reinforcement Areas table the reinforcement spacings obtained for the designed slab

Close the Reinforcement Areas


table

3.4. Calculations of the Provided (Real) Reinforcement Area

Code: BS 8110
LMC on the field for selection of Selects the initial layout of the Robot Millennium program
layouts in the Robot program:
Structure Model / Geometry

38 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Select – by window selection – the Selects the plate for which provided (real) reinforcement will
whole plate (the plate becomes be calculated.
highlighted) NOTE: if a model includes more panels, then these panels
should be selected for which provided reinforcement
is to be calculated.

Analysis / Design of RC Structure Starts provided reinforcement calculations of the plate.


Elements / RC Plate and Shell Accept messages if any are displayed.
Design / Provided Reinforcement

Activates display of the bottom reinforcement

Opens the Reinforcement Pattern dialog box

Select the Bars option On the General tab – selects the Bars option in the
Reinforcement type field; it means that the generated plate
reinforcement will be the reinforcement with the use of
reinforcing bars

OK Accepts the selection made and closes the Reinforcement


Pattern dialog box

Opens the Calculation Option Set dialog box

Calculations Assumes standard calculation parameters and starts


calculations of the plate provided reinforcement.
Viewing calculation results – the drawing below shows
results and the Punching tab in the Results dialog box.

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 39


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

4. Examples of Structure Definitions (Extrude and


Revolve Options)
Chapter 4 contains a presentation of several short examples of modeling three-dimensional structures
by means of extrude and revolve options. All the presented structures are defined as shells.
The following rules will be applied during the presentation of these structures:
• any icon symbol means that the relevant icon is pressed with the left mouse button,
• ( x ) stands for selection of the ‘x’ option in the dialog box or entering the ‘x’ value,
• LMC and RMC - abbreviations for the Left Mouse button Click and the Right Mouse button Click.

In order to start defining a structure, one should run the Robot Millennium program (press the
relevant icon or select the relevant command from the toolbar). After a while, there appears on screen
the dialog box (described in chapter 2.1 of the manual), where one should select the second icon in
the second row (Shell design).

4.1 Silo

This example provides a definition of a silo, presented schematically on the drawing below.
Data units: (m).

40 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

STRUCTURE DEFINITION

Silo Geometry

OPERATION PERFORMED DESCRIPTION

View / Projection / XY Selection of work plane

View / Grid / Grid Step Definition Opens the Grid Step Definition dialog box.

Dx = Dy =1.0 Defines grid step on a screen (equal in both directions)

Apply, Close Accepts the defined parameters and closes the Grid Step
Definition dialog box.

Opening the Polyline - contour dialog box to define


successive components of a contour

Select Contour option in the


Definition method part of the dialog
box

Define the following square on the Definition of the square that will serve as the basis for
graphical viewer: side length: 2m, modeling the silo
points: (-1,-1,0), (-1,1,0), (1,1,0), (1,-
1,0)

Close the Polyline - contour dialog


box

View / Projection / 3d xyz

Select the Edit / Substructure Opening the Objects: operations/modifications dialog


modification / Object modification box
command from the menu

LMC in the Object field and indicate Selection of the square (the number of the object defined in
with the cursor the square defined on the Object field)
the graphical viewer

Press the Extrude button Beginning of the definition of object modification

Press the Object modification Definition of the parameters of extrusion


parameters button

Define the following extrusion Extrusion parameters


parameters:
II to axis Z,
Length: (5) m
Division number = (5)
Inactive options: top, base

Press the Apply button Extrusion performed for the square according to the defined
parameters

Press the Scaling button Beginning of the definition of the operation of modifying the
result of extruding the object

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 41


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Press the Operation parameters Definition of the parameters of modification to be applied to


button the extruded square

Define scaling parameters: Parameters of scaling to be performed on the operation of


Scale x=y= (3) extrusion
Scale z= (1)
Scale center (0,0,0)

Press the Apply button The operation of scaling is applied to the product of
extrusion of the square according to the defined parameters

Press the Extrude button Beginning of object modification definition

Press the Object modification Definition of the parameters of extrusion


parameters button (if necessary to
expand)

Define the following extrusion Extrusion parameters


parameters:
II to axis Z,
Length: (10) m
Number of divisions = (10)
Inactive options: top, base

Press the Apply button Extrusion performed for the square according to the defined
parameters

Close the Objects: operations /


modifications dialog box

Initial view

Opening the dialog box used for defining thickness

Select the default panel thickness: Selection of the thickness that will be applied to particular
TH_30CONCR components of the silo

Write all in the Panels field Selection of all silo elements

Press the Apply button Application of the default thickness to all the elements of the
silo

Close the FE Thickness dialog box

Support Structure

Opening the Bars dialog box

LMC in the Bar type field and select Selection of bar properties
the type: RC Beam
LMC in the Section field and select
the type B50x70

42 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Define the following four bars: Definition of RC beams


beam 1: begin. (-3,-3,5), end (3,-3,5)
beam 2: begin. (3,-3,5), end (3,3,5)
beam 3: begin. (3,3,5), end (-3,3,5)
beam 4: begin. (-3,3,5), end (-3,-3,5)

LMC in the Bar type field and select Selection of bar properties. The section from the American
the type: Column section database (AISC) has been used.
LMC in the Section field and select
the type W14x211 (if the section is
absent on the list of available
sections, open the New section
dialog box by pressing the
button and select the required
section)

Define the following four steel Definition of steel columns


columns of the 10 m length:
col.1: begin. (-3,-3,5), end (-3,-3,-5)
col.2: begin. (3,-3,5), end (3,-3,-5)
col.3: begin. (3,3,5), end (3,3,-5)
col.4: begin. (-3,3,5), end (-3,3,-5)

LMC in the Bar type field and select Selection of bar properties. The section from the American
the type: Simple bar section database (AISC) has been used.
LMC in the Section field and select
the type W14x211 (if the section is
absent on the list of available
sections, open the New section
dialog box by pressing the
button and select the required
section)

Define the following four beams: Definition of steel spandrel beams


beam1:begin. (-3,-3,-1), end (3,-3,-1)
beam2:begin. (3,-3,-1), end (3,3,-1)
beam3:begin. (3,3,-1), end (-3,3,-1)
beam4:begin. (-3,3,-1), end (-3,-3,-1)

LMC in the Bar type field and select Selection of bar properties. The section from the American
the type: Simple Bar section database (AISC) has been used.
LMC in the Section field and select
the type L 4x4x0.25 (if the section is
absent on the list of available
sections, open the New section
dialog box by pressing the
button and select the required
section)

Define the following bracings: Bracing definition


1: begin. (-3,-3,5), end (3,-3,-1)
2: begin. (3,-3,5), end (-3,-3,-1)

3: begin. (3,-3,5), end (3,3,-1)


4: begin. (3,3,5), end (3,-3,-1)

Close the Bars dialog box

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 43


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Select bracing 1 and 2

Edit / Edit / Translate Opening the dialog box used to define translation

Translation vector (0,6,0)


Edit mode = Copy
Drag = switched off, Execute

Select bracing 3 and 4

Translation vector (-6,0,0)


Edit mode = Copy
Drag = switched off, Execute

Close the Translation dialog box

Opening the Supports dialog box

LMC in the Current selection field on Selection of structure nodes where structure supports will
the Nodal tab be applied

Go to the graphical viewer; while You should see numbers of support nodes appearing in the
pressing the left mouse button, Current selection field
select all bottom nodes of columns

Select the fixed support icon in the Selection of support type, the selected support type will be
Supports dialog box (it will become applied to the selected structure nodes
highlighted), Apply

Close Closing the Supports dialog box

Analysis / Calculation model / Creation of the structure calculation model (mesh of planar
Generation finite elements)

44 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

4.2 Cooler

This example provides a definition of a shell structure (chimney cooler), presented schematically
in the drawing below.
Data units: (m).

OPERATION PERFORMED DESCRIPTION

View / Projection / ZX Selection of a work plane

Geometry / Objects / Arc Opening the Arc dialog box to define successive
components of a contour

Select the following arc definition


method: beginning, end, middle

Define the following arc on the Define an arc


graphical viewer:
Begin. (-10,0,10)
End (-10,0,-10)
Middle (-7,0,0)

Close Closing the Arc dialog box

CTRL + A Selection of the defined arc object

Geometry / Objects / Revolve Opening the Revolve dialog box

Define the rotation parameters: Rotation parameters


Axis: beginning (0,0,0)
end (0,0,10)
rotation angle (360)
number of divisions: (36)
Inactive options: top, base, new
object

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 45


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Apply, Yes Rotation of the object is performed, accepting the message


about limitations of the Revolve function for revolutions by
360-degree angle

Close Closing the Revolve dialog box

View / Projection / 3d xyz

Opening the dialog box used for defining thickness

Select the default panel thickness: Selection of the thickness that will be applied to particular
TH_30CONCR components of the structure

Write all in the Panels field Selection of all structure elements

Apply Application of the default thickness to all the elements of the


structure

Close the FE Thickness dialog box

View / Display Opening the Display dialog box for visualizing selected
attributes

Select the Thickness option on the


Finite Element tab

Apply, OK Closing the Display dialog box for visualizing selected


attributes

Initial view

Opening the Supports dialog box

Select Line option in the Current


selection group

Select the fixed support icon in the Selection of the support type
Supports dialog box (the icon will be
highlighted)

Indicate the bottom line (circle) of the NOTE: To select the circle you have to find a place along its
structure circumference in such a way it will get highlighted. If
you have trouble finding this place, you should add
labels by checking the “numbers and labels of
edges” on the Finite Elements tab in the Display
dialog box.

Close Closing the Supports dialog box

Analysis / Calculation model / Creation of the structure calculation model (mesh of planar
Generation finite elements)

46 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

4.3 Pipeline
This example provides a definition of shell structure (pipe), presented schematically in the drawing
below.
Data units: (m).

OPERATION PERFORMED DESCRIPTION

View / Projection / ZX Selection of the work plane

Geometry / Objects / Circle Opening the Circle dialog box to define contour
components

Select the Center - radius option in


the Definition Method group of the
dialog box

In the graphical viewer, define a Definition of a circle that will be the basis for creating the
circle with the radius of 1 m and the pipeline
center at the point (0,0,0)

Close the Circle dialog box

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 47


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

View / Projection / 3d xyz

Select the Edit / Substructure Opening the dialog box Objects - operations /
modification / Object modification modifications
command from the menu

LMC in in the Object field and Selection of the circle (the number of the object is
indicate the defined circle in the introduced into the Object field)
graphical viewer

Press the Extrude button Beginning of the definition of object modification

Press the Object modification Definition of the parameters of extrusion


parameters button

Define the following parameters of Extrusion parameters


extrusion:
II to axis Y,
length (20) m
number of divisions (20)
Inactive options: top, base

Apply Extrusion performed for the circle according to the defined


parameters

Press the Revolve button Opening the Revolve dialog box

Define the following parameters for Rotation parameters


revolving the object:
axis beginning (2,20,0)
end (2,20,1)
rotation angle (-90)
number of divisions (5)
Inactive options: top, base

Apply Rotation of the object is performed

Press the Extrude button Beginning to define the parameters of extrusion

Define the following parameters of Extrusion parameters


extrusion:
II to axis X,
length (2) m
number of divisions (2)
Inactive options: top, base

Press the Apply button Extrusion performed for the circle according to the defined
parameters

Press the Revolve button Opening the Revolve dialog box

Define the following parameters for Rotation parameters


revolving the object:
axis beginning (4,24,0)
end (4,24,1)
rotation angle (90)
number of divisions (5)
Inactive options: top, base

48 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Apply Rotation of the object is performed

Press the Extrude button Beginning of the definition of object modification

Define the following parameters of Extrusion parameters


extrusion:
II to axis Y,
length (10) m
number of divisions (10)
Inactive options: top, base

Apply Extrusion performed for the circle according to the defined


parameters

Close

Initial view

Analysis / Calculation model / Creation of the structure calculation model (mesh of planar
Generation finite elements)

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 49


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

4.4 Axisymmetrical Structures


This example provides a definition of shell structure, presented schematically in the drawing below.
Data units: (m).

OPERATION PERFORMED DESCRIPTION

View / Projection / ZX Selection of a work plane

Geometry / Objects / Arc Opening the Arc dialog box to define successive
components of a contour

Select the following arc definition


method: beginning, end, middle

Define the following arc in the


graphical viewer:
Begin (0,0,10)
End (0,0,-10)
Middle (-5,0,0)

Close Closing the Arc dialog box

CTRL + A Selection of the defined arc object

Geometry / Objects / Revolve Opening the Revolve dialog box

Define the rotation parameters: Rotation parameters


Axis: beginning (0,0,0)
end (-5,0,0)
rotation angle (180)
number of divisions (18)
Inactive options: top, base, new
object

50 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Apply Rotation of the object is performed

Close Closing the Revolve dialog box

View / Projection / 3D xyz

Opening the dialog box used for defining thickness

Select the default panel thickness: Selection of the thickness that will be applied to particular
TH_30CONCR components of the structure

Write all in the Panels field Selection of all structure elements

Apply Application of the default thickness to all the elements of the


structure

Close the FE Thickness dialog box

View / Display Opening the Display dialog box for visualizing selected
attributes

Select the Thickness option on the


Finite Elements tab

Apply, OK Closing the Display dialog box for visualizing selected


attributes

Analysis / Calculation model / Creation of the structure calculation model (mesh of planar
Generation finite elements)

This example provides a definition of shell structure, presented schematically in the drawing below.
Data units: (m).

OPERATION PERFORMED DESCRIPTION

View / Projection / ZX Selection of the work plane

Opening the Polyline - contour dialog box to define


successive components of a contour

Select Line option in the Definition


method part of the dialog box

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 51


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Define two lines in the graphical Definition of two lines


viewer:
line 1: beginning (-10,0,0)
end (-10,0,10)
line 2: beginning (-15,0,0)
end (-15,0,5)

Close Closing the Polyline - contour dialog box

Geometry / Objects / Arc Opening the Arc dialog box to define successive
components of a contour

Select the following arc definition


method: center, begin, end

Define the following two arcs in the


graphical viewer:
Arc 1 with radius = 5
Center (-10,0,5)
Begin. (-15,0,5)
End (-10,0,10)
Arc 2 with radius = 10
Center (0,0,10)
Begin. (-10,0,10)
End (0,0,20)

Close Closing the Arc dialog box

CTRL + A Selection of the defined arc object

Geometry / Objects / Revolve Opening the Revolve dialog box

Define the rotation parameters: Rotation parameters


Axis: beginning (0,0,10)
end (0,0,20)
rotation angle (360)
number of divisions (36)
Inactive options: top, base, new
object

Apply Rotation of the object is performed

Close Closing the Revolve dialog box

View / Projection / 3d xyz

Opening the dialog box used for defining thickness

Select the default panel thickness: Selection of the thickness that will be applied to particular
TH_30CONCR components of the structure

Write all in the Panels field Selection of all structure elements

Apply Application of the default thickness to all the elements of the


structure

Close the FE Thickness dialog box

52 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Initial view

View / Display Opening the Display dialog box for visualizing selected
attributes

Select the Thickness option on the


FE tab

Apply, OK Closing the Display dialog box for visualizing selected


attributes

Opening the Supports dialog box

Select Line option in the Current


selection group

Select the fixed support icon in the Selection of the support type
Supports dialog box (the icon will be
highlighted)

Point to the bottom line (circle) of the NOTE: To select the circle you have to find a place along its
structure and select it circumference in such a way it will get highlighted.
If you have trouble finding this place, you should add
labels by checking the “numbers and labels of
edges” on the Finite Elements tab in the Display
dialog box.

Close Closing the Supports dialog box

Analysis / Calculation model / Creation of the structure calculation model (mesh of planar
Generation finite elements)

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 53


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

5. Design of a 2D Frame
The following is an example of a definition, analysis and design of a simple, 2D steel frame presented
in the drawing below.
Data units: (m) and (kN).

Three load cases will be applied to the structure (self-weight and two cases of live loads presented
in the drawing below). Moreover, (10) load cases generated automatically for snow/wind loads will be
applied to the structure.

CASE 2 CASE 3

The following rules will be applied during structure definition:


• any icon symbol means that the relevant icon is pressed with the left mouse button,
• ( x ) stands for selection of the ‘x’ option in the dialog box or entering the ‘x’ value,
• LMC and RMC - abbreviations for the Left Mouse button Click and the Right Mouse button Click.

In order to start defining a structure, one should run the Robot Millennium program (press the
relevant icon or select the relevant command from the toolbar). After a while, there appears on screen
the dialog box (described in chapter 2.1 of the manual), where one should select the second icon in
the first row (2D frame).

NOTE: The European (French) section database (CATPRO) and the French snow/wind code
have been used in this example.

54 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

5.1 Structure Model Definition

OPERATION PERFORMED DESCRIPTION

The BARS layout should be selected from those available in


Structure model / Bars the Robot Millennium program

LMC in the Bar type field and select Definition of bar properties. The section from the French
the Column type section database (CATPRO) has been used in this
LMC in the Section field and select example.
the HEA 300 type (if the section is
absent from the list of available
sections, one should open the New
section dialog box by pressing the
button and select the required
section)

LMC in the Beginning field (the Beginning of the definition of structure bars (columns of the
bacground will be highlighted in structure)
green)

column 1: Definition of columns in the frame


(0,0) (0,5)
(0,5) (0,10)
(0,10) (0,15)
column 2:
(8,0) (8,5)
column 3:
(16,0) (16,5)
(16,5) (16,10)
(16,10) (16,15)
column 4:
(24,0) (24,5)
(24,5) (24,8)

LMC in the Bar type field and select Beginning of the definition of structure beams and definition
the Beam type. of their properties. The section from the French section
LMC in the Section field and select database (CATPRO) has been used in this example.
the type HEA 300

LMC in the Beginning field (the Beginning of the definition of structure beams
background will be highlighted in
green)

beam 1: Definition of beams in the frame


(0,5) (8,5)
(8,5) (16,5)
(16,5) (24,5)
beam 2:
(0,10) (16,10)
beam 3:
(16,10) (24,8)
beam 4:
(0,15) (16,15)

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 55


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

LMC in the field for selecting layouts Selection of the initial layout of the Robot Millennium
in the Robot Millennium program program
and select Structure model / Start

Initial view

Opening the Supports dialog box

LMC on the Current selection field on Selection of structure nodes where supports will be applied
the Nodal tab

Go to the graphical viewer; while The selected nodes 1, 5, 7 and 11 will be introduced into the
pressing the left mouse button, Actual selection field
select all the bottom nodes of
columns

Select the icon denoting a fixed Selection of support type


support in the Supports dialog box
(it will get highlighted)

Apply, Close The selected support type will be applied to the selected
nodes of the structure

5.2 Definition of Load Cases and Loads

Opening the Load Types dialog box

LMC on the New button Definition of a case with the dead nature (self-weight) and
the standard label DL1

LMC the Nature field Selection of the nature of load case: live
(Live)

LMC the New button Definition of two load cases with the live nature and
LMC the New button standard labels LL1 and LL2

Close Closing the Load types dialog box

Loads / Load Table Opening the table for defining loads operating in the defined
load cases

Press , to place the table in the Reducing the table size in order to make the graphical load
bottom part of the screen, so that it definition possible
takes the entire width of the viewer
and allows the model of the defined
structure to be visible

LMC the second cell in the CASE Definition of loads operating in the second load case
column, select the 2. load case: LL1

Continuing in the same row LMC the Selection of load type


cell in the LOAD TYPE column,
selection of the uniform load

56 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

LMC the cell in the LIST column, Selection of bars to which the uniform load will be applied
graphical selection in the viewer of
the beam 1 (bars 10to12)

LMC the cell in the "pz=" column and Selection of the direction and value of the uniform load
enter the (-20) value

LMC the third cell in the CASE Definition of loads operating in the third load case
column, select Load case 3 - LL2

LMC the cell in the LOAD TYPE Selection of load type


column, select the uniform load

LMC the cell in the LIST column, Selection of bars to which the uniform load will be applied
select graphically the beam 2 (bar
13)

LMC the cell in the "pz=" column and Selection of the direction and value of the uniform load
enter the (-14) value

Close the table of loads

5.3 Definition of Snow/Wind Loads


French code: NV65/N84 Mod.96
Loads / Special loads / Wind and Opening of the Snow and Wind 2D/3D dialog box
Snow 2D/3D

Press the Auto button; Automatic generation of the structure envelope for
inactive options: the generation of snow/wind loads (in the Envelope field the
without parapets program introduces the following node numbers: 1, 2, 3, 4,
with base not on ground 10, 9, 13, 12, 11) and definition of basic parameters for the
isolated roofs structure envelope

Define the following parameters: Definition of the basic parameters of snow/wind loads
Total depth = (60)
Bay spacing = (10)
active options:
wind
snow

Press the Parameters button Opening the additional dialog box (Snow/|wind Loads),
where one can define detailed parameters

Define the parameters of snow/wind Definition of parameters for snow/wind loads


load:
Global parameters tab:
Departament: Alpes-Maritimes
altitude above the sea level: (200)
structure height: (15) m
reference level: (0.8) m
rise of roof: automatic

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 57


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Wind tab: Definition of parameters for snow/wind loads


Site: Normal
Type: Normal
Wind pressure: automatic
Structure dimension effect:
automatic
inactive options in the Specific
actions group

Snow tab: Definition of parameters for snow/wind loads


Type: Normal and accidental
Snow pressure: automatic for normal
and extreme
active option: Snow redistribution
inactive other options in the Snow
gathering field

Generate Pressing the button results in starting the generation of


snow and wind loads with the accepted parameters.
The calculation note will appear on screen. It will present the
parameters of snow/wind laod cases

Close editor with the calculation note

Close the Snow and Wind 2D/3D


dialog box

5.4 Structure Analysis

Calculations of the defined structure are started. Once they


are completed, the upper bar of the Robot program will
display the message: Results (FEM) - available.

5.5 Detailed Analysis

Select beam 1 in the graphical


viewer (bars 10,11,12)

LMC the Robot Millennium program Detailed analysis of structure bars is commenced.
layout selection: The monitor screen is divided into two parts: the graphical
Results / Detailed analysis viewer presenting the structure model and the Detailed
analysis dialog box

Select the second load case

In the Detailed analysis dialog box Selection of the quantities to be presented for the selected
leave the option Open a new window beam
switched off,
on the NTM tab select the MY
Moments option

58 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Apply An additional graphical viewer appears on screen.


It consists of two parts: a graphical presentation of
information (diagrams, loads, bar sections) for selected bars
and a table presenting numerical results obtained for
selected bars

In the Detailed analysis dialog box Selection of the quantities to be presented for the selected
select the following options: beam
Select the maximum stress Smax on
the Stresses tab
Select Characteristic points on the
Division points tab,
LMC in Refresh

Apply Adds new quantities to be presented for the selected beam

Select the Global extremes tab in the Activates presentation of global extremes obtained for the
table selected beam (see figure below).

Exit Closing the viewer presenting the detailed analysis of the


selected beam

5.6 Structure Design


Eurocode 3
LMC the Robot Millennium program Design of steel structure members is commenced.
layout selection: The monitor screen is divided into three parts: the graphical
Structure design / Steel/Aluminum viewer, the Definitions dialog box and the Calculations
design dialog box

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 59


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

LMC the New button on the Groups Definition of member groups is commenced
tab in the Definitions dialog box

Define the first group with the Definition of the first group consisting of all the columns
following parameters: in the structure
Number: 1
Name: columns
Member list: 1to9
Material: STEEL Carbon Fy 36 ksi

Save Saving the parameters of the first member group

LMC the New button on the Groups Definition of the second group
tab in the Definitions dialog box

Define the second group with the Definition of the first group consisting of all the beams in the
following parameters: structure
Number: 2
Name: beams
Member list: 10to15
Material: STEEL Carbon Fy 36 ksi

Save Saving the parameters of the first member group

LMC the List button in the Code Going to the Calculations dialog box and opening the
group design line in the Calculations Code group selection dialog box
dialog box

LMC the All button (in the field above Selection of the member groups to be designed
the Previous button, there will
appear the list: 1to2), Close

LMC the Load case selection Opening the Load case selection dialog box
button (Calculations dialog box)

LMC the field above the Previous Selection of the first three load cases
button; there will appear the list:
1to3, Close

Activate the option: Optimization Group design will use the optimization procedures
and Limit state: Ultimate (appropriate sections with respect to their weight);
the ultimate limit state will be checked

LMC the Calculations button Design of the selected member groups is commenced;
there appears the Short results dialog box on screen

60 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

LMC the Change all button in the Change of the currenly used profiles in the members
Code group design dialog box belonging to both member groups to the calculated sections
shown above; accept the warning (for columns: from HEA 300 to HEA 240, for beams: from
about the possible change of the HEA 300 to HEA 500). Once the sections are changed,
result status to ‘not available’ the upper bar of Robot will display the following message:
Results (FEM) - out of date.

Close Closing the Code group design dialog box

Recalculation of the structure with the changed member


sections. Once the sections are changed, the upper bar of
Robot will display the following message: Results (FEM) -
available.

LMC the Calculations button in the Re-design of the selected member groups in the structure
Calculations dialog box (1,2) with the optimization options active; there will appear
the Short results viewer

LMC the Change all button in the Change of the currenly used profiles in the members
Code group design dialog box; belonging to both member groups to the calculated
accept the warning about the sections. Once the sections are changed, the upper bar of
possible change of the result status Robot will display the following message: Results (FEM) -
to ‘not available’ out of date.

Close Closing the Code group design dialog box

Recalculation of the structure with the changed member


sections. Once the sections are changed, the upper bar of
Robot will display the following message: Results (FEM) -
available.

LMC the Calculations button in the Re-design of the selected member groups in the structure
Calculations dialog box (1,2) with the optimization options active; there will appear
the Short results viewer shown below. When the sections
do not change during group design one can say the
calculated sections are the optimal sections for designing
member groups.

Close Closing the Code group design dialog box

LMC in the Member verification field Selection of members to be verified


in the Calculations dialog box and
enter there: (1to15)

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 61


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

LMC the Load case list field in the Selection of all load cases
Calculations dialog box and enter
there: (1to3)

LMC the Calculations button Verification of the selected structure members is started
(the verification is performed to obtain the results for
particular structure members; however, it is not necessary);
there will appear the Short results viewer

Close Closing the Member verification dialog box

5.7 Global Analysis

LMC the Robot Millennium program Selection of the initial Robot Millennium layout.
layout selection: Structure Model /
Start

Results / Global analysis - bars Beginning of the global analysis of all the bars in the
structure. An additional graphical viewer appears. It consists
of two parts: the graphical presentation of information and
the table presenting the numerical results

RMC while the cursor is located in A context menu appears on screen


the additional graphical viewer

Table Columns Selection of this option in the context menu opens


the Parameters of presentation windows dialog box

Stresses tab: activate the Normal Selection of quantites for which global analysis will be
option presented
Design tab: activate the Ratio option

LMC the OK button The selection is accepted

LMC the Upper limit in the table and The upper value of the ratio is determined
enter the value 1.0

RMC while the cursor is located in A context menu appears on screen


the additional graphical viewer

Select the Constant display of limit The values of limits are presented with horizontal lines in the
values option graphical viewer of global analysis (see below).

62 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Close the graphical viewer with global analysis presented

5.8 Design of Steel Connections


Code: Eurocode 3
LMC the field of the Robot Design of steel connections in a structure starts. The screen
Millennium program layout selection will be divided into two parts: the Object Inspector dialog
Structure design / Connections box (Steel Connections) and the graphical viewer; at the
bottom of the graphical viewer there are three tabs:
Scheme, 3D View and Structure.

Move on to the Structure tab; Selection of bars for which the connection will be verified.
select the middle bar in the outmost The selected bars are pointed out with arrows in the figure
left column and the middle beam – below.
RMC in the graphical viewer
presenting the structure, choose
Select in the context menu while
pressing the CTRL button, click the
left mouse button on the mentioned
bars

Connections / New Connection for A connection is defined between the selected bars;
Selected Bars the Connection definition dialog box starts to display
several tabs. They allow modifying individual parameters of
the connection.

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 63


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Select the Welds option on the Selection of a type of a defined steel connection
Sections tab in the Connection
definition dialog box,
Apply

Connections / Calculations Opening of the Connection calculations dialog box

LMC the List field in the Load cases Definition of load cases considered during the connection
field verification

Enter here (1to3) Selection of all the load cases

LMC the Calculations button Connection verification starts; short results are presented in
the Object Inspector dialog box and a detailed calculation
note is displayed on the Results tab (this tab is accessible
only after calculations of the connection are performed).

Selection of the extreme left support Selection of bars for which the connection will be verified
node with the column (concrete base of a column)

Connections / New Connection for A connection is defined between the selected bars.
Selected Bars The dialog box starts to display several tabs.
Connections / Calculations Opening of the Connection calculations dialog box

LMC the List field in the Load cases Definition of load cases considered during the connection
field verification

Enter here (1to3) Selection of all the load cases

LMC the Calculations button Connection verification starts; short results are presented in
the Object Inspector dialog box and a detailed calculation
note is displayed on the Results tab (this tab is accessible
only after calculations of the connection are performed).

5.9 Printout Composition

LMC the field of the Robot Selection of the initial Robot Millennium program layout
Millennium program layout selection
Structure Model / Start

File / Printout composition Opening the Printout composition - Wizard dialog box,
where one can define the shape of the printout for the
currently designed structure

LMC the Simplified printout tab Go to the Simplified printout tab

Activate the options (symbol ): Data concerning quantity survey and combinations will not
Quantity survey and Combinations be included in the printout

Select the following data from the Selection of the data to be presented for the results of
available lists: structure calculations
Reactions - global extremes
Displacements - envelope
Forces - values
Stresses - envelope

64 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

LMC the Save template button Pressing this button results in going to the Templates tab in
the Printout composition - Wizard dialog box and
including the selected simplified printout elements in the
right panel.

LMC New button on the Templates Definition of a new user’s template


tab

In the left panel, there will appear an Saving the user’s template
additional line where one should
write the name of the new template,
e.g. My template and press the
ENTER button.

LMC the Standard tab Going to the Standard tab

Highlight the option in the left panel: Selection of elements for prinout composition
Member group design

LMC the Add button Going to the selected option in the right panel

LMC the Preview button Presentation of the print preview of the defined printout for
the designed structure

Close Closing the print preview viewer

Close Closing the Printout composition - Wizard dialog box

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 65


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

6. Definition of Moving Loads for a 2D Frame


This example presents the definition, analysis and design of a simple 2D frame (see the figure below),
for which a moving load case is defined.
Units: (m) and (kN).

Three load cases will be applied to the structure (self-weight and two load cases: wind and snow,
shown in the figure below). Moreover, a moving load case will be applied to the structure.

LOAD CASE 2 LOAD CASE 3

MOVING LOAD CASE

The following rules will apply during structure definition:


• any icon symbol means that the relevant icon is pressed with the left mouse button,
• ( x ) stands for selection of the ‘x’ option in the dialog box or entering the ‘x’ value,
• LMC and RMC - abbreviations for the Left Mouse button Click and the Right Mouse button Click.

In order to start defining a structure, one should run the Robot Millennium program (press the
relevant icon or select the relevant command from the toolbar). After a while, there appears on screen

66 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

the dialog box (described in chapter 2.1 of the manual), where one should select the first icon in the

first row (2D frame ).

NOTE: The European (French) section database (CATPRO) is used in the example.

6.1 Definition of the Structure Model

OPERATION PERFORMED DESCRIPTION

Starts the definition of structure axes. The Structural axis


dialog box appears on screen.
In the X tab: Definition of the parameters of vertical structural axes.
Position: {0}
Number of repetitions: {4}
Distance: {3}
Numbering: A, B, C ...

LMC the Insert button Vertical axes have been defined and introduced into the Set
of defined axes field.

LMC in the Z tab Starts the definition of the parameters of horizontal


structural axes.

In the Z tab: Defines the parameters of horizontal structural axes.


enter the following coordinates of the
successive axes:
{0}, Insert
{3}, Insert
{5}, Insert
{6.5}, Insert
Numbering: 1, 2, 3 ...

Apply, Close Creates the defined structural axes and closes the
Structural axis dialog box.

6.1.1 Definition of Structure Bars

Opens the Sections dialog box

Opens the New sections dialog box

Select the I-section group in the Defines a new section and closes the New sections dialog
Section field and select the following box
sections: HEA 200, HEA 260 and
IPE 200
Add, Close

Close Closes the Sections dialog box

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 67


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Opens the Bars dialog box

LMC in the BAR TYPE field: Column Selects bar properties


LMC in the SECTION field and select
the section type: HEA 260

LMC in the Beginning field (color of a Starts defining bars in the structure (columns of the
field background changes to green) structure)

Column 1 - between the points A1- Defines structure columns. The figure below presents
A3, with the following coordinates: the structure created up to this moment.
(0,0) (0,5)

Column 2 - between the points E1-


E3, with the following coordinates:
(12,0) (12,5)

Column 3 – between the points C1-


C2, with the following coordinates:
(6,0) (6,3)

Close Closes the Bars dialog box

6.1.2 Definition of Library Structures (a Roof and an Overhead


Traveling Crane Beam)

Opens the Typical structures dialog box and starts


defining a library structure (roof).
Selects the triangular truss of type 1. On screen, there
appears the Merge structure dialog box where one may
LMC (twice) the icon define truss parameters
(1st icon in the last row)

68 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

In the Dimensions tab Defines truss length (one may also define it graphically in
LMC the Length L field the graphical viewer)
{12}

LMC the Height H field Defines truss height (one may also define it graphically in
{1.5} the graphical viewer)

LMC in the Number of fields field Defines the number of fields into which the truss will be
{8} divided

LMC in the Insert tab

LMC in the Insertion point field Defines the insertion node for the truss
select point A3 with the following
coordinates (0,0,5)

Apply, OK Creates the defined structure in the indicated place within


the structure and closes the Merge structure dialog box

Geometry / Releases Opens the Releases dialog box

LMC on the release type: Pinned- Selects the release type to be assigned to the truss bar
Fixed

LMC on the Current selection field, Selects the truss bar; ATTENTION: take note of the arrows
switch to the graphic viewer and that appear on the highlighted truss bar – while indicating
indicate the highest truss post (in the the bar the arrows should be pointed up (the direction of the
roof ridge) release is significant: at the first node the pinned connection
remains, whereas at the second one – the fixed connection
is defined)

Close Closes the Releases dialog box

Reopens the Typical structures dialog box and starts


defining a library structure (moving-crane beam).
LMC (twice) in the icon Selects the rectangular truss of type 3. On screen, there
appears the Merge structure dialog box where one may
define truss parameters

On the Dimensions tab Defines truss length (one may also define it graphically in
LMC the Length L field the graphical viewer)
{12}

LMC the Height H field Defines truss height (one may also define it graphically in
{1.0} the graphical viewer)

LMC in the Number of fields field Defines the number of fields into which the truss will be
{8} divided

LMC in the Insert tab

LMC in the Insertion point field Defines the insertion node for the truss
select the point with the following
coordinates (0,0,2)

Apply, OK Creates the defined structure in the indicated place within


the structure and closes the Merge structure dialog box

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 69


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Opens the Sections dialog box

LMC in the Lines/Bars field, select all Selects truss bars


bars of both trusses

LMC in the IPE 200 section Selects the section that will be applied to selected bars

Apply, accept the material change to Applies section IPE 200 to all truss bars
the default one

LMC in the Lines/Bars field, select Selects bars (bar No. 8)


the upper chord of the moving-crane
truss

LMC in the HEA 200 section Selects the section that will be applied to selected bars

Apply, Close Applies section HEA 200 to the truss bars and closes the
Sections dialog box

Select the side posts of the moving-


crane truss and the central post (see
the figure) - the bars become
highlighted (bars 108, 112 and 116)

Press the Delete button on the Deletes the selected structure bars
keyboard

6.1.3 Support Definition

Opens the Supports dialog box

LMC in the Current selection field on Selects structure nodes where supports will be applied
the Nodal tab

70 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Go to the graphical viewer; while The selected nodes (1 3 5) will be inserted in the Current
holding the left mouse button selection field.
pressed, select with the window all
the lower nodes of the columns
(the points located at the level of
structural axis 1)

In the Supports dialog box, select Selects the support type


the icon referring to the fixed support
(it will be highlighted)

Apply The selected support type will be applied to the selected


structure nodes.

Close Closes the Supports dialog box

6.1.4 Definition of Structure Loads

LMC in the Robot Millennium layout Selects the Robot Millennium layout that allows one to
selection field define structure loads
Structure model / Loads

LMC in the New button in the Load Defines the following load case:
types dialog box nature: dead (self-weight)
standard name: DL1

LMC in the Nature field: Selects load case nature: wind


Wind

LMC in the New button Defines the following load case:


nature: wind
standard name: WIND1

LMC in the Nature field Selects load case nature: snow


Snow

LMC in the New button Defines the following load case:


nature: snow
standard name: SN1

The self-weight was applied automatically to all structure


bars in the first row (direction "-Z”)

LMC the second field in the CASE Defines loads operating for the second load case
column and select 2nd load case:
WIND1

LMC the field in the LOAD TYPE Selects load type


column and select the uniform load

LMC the field in the LIST column and Selects the bar to which the program will apply the load with
select graphically in the graphical nodal forces (bar 1)
viewer the left structure column

LMC the field in the "px=" column Selects the direction and value of the load
and type the value 5.0

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 71


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

LMC the third field in the CASE Defines loads operating for the third load case
column, select 3rd load case: SN1

LMC the field in the LOAD TYPE Selects load type


column and select the uniform load

LMC the field in the LIST column and Selects the bar to which the program will apply the uniform
select graphically in the graphical load (bars 5 and 6)
viewer the upper chords of the roof
truss

LMC the field in the "pz=" column Selects the direction and value of the uniform load
and enter the value: -3.0

LMC in the Robot Millennium layout Selects the initial Robot Millennium layout
selection field
Structure Model / Start

6.1.5 Definition of a Moving Load Applied to the Structure

Tools / Job Preferences Opens the Job Preferences dialog box

LMC the Databases / Vehicle Selects the option from the tree in the left part of the dialog
database option box

Pressing the Create a new database icon results in opening


the New moving load dialog box

Type: Defines a user database


in the Database field: USER
in the Database name field:
User-defined database
Units: length - (m)
force - (kN)

Create Closes the New moving load dialog box

OK Closes the Job Preferences dialog box

Loads / Special loads / Moving Opens the Moving loads dialog box

Opens the Moving loads dialog box and starts defining


a new vehicle

On the Symmetric vehicles tab LMC Defines a new vehicle


on the New button

Type the vehicle name: Moving Defines the name of the new vehicle and closes the New
crane, OK vehicle dialog box

LMC the first line in the table located Defines the operating forces
in the lower part of the dialog box

Select the load type: concentrated Selects a load type


force

72 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

F = 30, X = -1.2, S = 0 Defines the value and location of the concentrated force

LMC the next line in the table located Defines the operating forces
in the lower part of the dialog box

Select the load type: concentrated Selects a load type


force

F = 30, X = 0.0, S = 0 Defines the value and location of the concentrated force

LMC the next line in the table located Defines the operating forces
in the lower part of the dialog box

Select the load type: concentrated Selects a load type


force

F = 30, X = 1.4, S = 0 Defines the value and location of the concentrated force.
The Moving loads dialog box is presented below.

LMC the Save to database button Opens the Moving load databases dialog box

OK in the Moving load databases Saves the defined vehicle to the user-defined database
dialog box

Add, Close Adds the defined vehicle to the list of active vehicles and
closes the Moving loads dialog box

In the Name field, type the name of Defines the name of the moving load
the moving load (case 4):
moving crane load

LMC the Define button Starts the definition of the route of the Moving Crane
vehicle: the Polyline - contour dialog box is opened, with
the Polyline option active.

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 73


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Define two points determining the Defines the vehicle route


route of the vehicle:
beginning (0,3)
end (12,3)

Apply, Close Closes the Polyline - contour dialog box

LMC the Step field {1} Defines the step of position change of the moving load and
Assume the default value of direction the direction of load application.
(0,0,-1), which means that the load
will operate in the Z direction and its
sense will be opposite with respect to
the sense of the Z axis

LMC the Selection option located in Selects the plane of load application
the Application plane field

{8} Selects the upper chord of the moving-crane truss (bar


no. 8)

LMC the Parameters button Opens the Route parameters dialog box

LMC the field for factors: Defines the factors for the forces operating along the
Coef. LR and coef. LL vehicle movement route. It generates the forces originating
and type the value 0.1 in vehicle braking, whose value equals 0.1*F

Switch on the following options: Switching these options on assures that the forces defining
Vehicle position limit – route the moving crane load will not be positioned off the defined
beginning structure model.
Vehicle position limit – route end

OK Closes the Route parameters dialog box

Apply, Close Generates the moving load case according to the adopted
parameters and closes the Moving loads dialog box.

6.2 Structure Analysis

Tools / Job Preferences Opens the Job Preferences dialog box

Structure Analysis Selects the Structure Analysis option from the tree in the
dialog box

Method of Solving the System of Selects the method of solving the equation system for the
Equations: Iterative defined structure

OK Accepts assumed parameters and closes the Job


Preferences dialog box

Starts calculations of the defined structure. Once the


calculations are completed, the title bar of the viewer will
present the following information: Finite Element Results -
available.

74 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

6.3 Presentation of the Vehicle and the Moving Load Case

View / Display Opens the Display dialog box

The Loads tab: switch on the Moving Presents the defined vehicle on the structure
loads - vehicle option, OK

Select load case 4 (moving-crane load)

Select 4: moving-crane load

Loads / Select case component Opens the Load component dialog box

Select: Current component 4 Select component 4 of the moving load case

LMC the Animation button Opens the Animation dialog box

LMC the Start button Starts the animation of the moving load over the structure;
the vehicle will move along the defined route.

Stops the vehicle animation


Stop (LMC the button) and
close the animation toolbar

Close Closes the Load component dialog box

6.4 Result Analysis

LMC the field for selecting Robot The RESULTS Robot Millennium layout opens.
Millennium layout The monitor screen will be divided into tree parts:
Results / Results the graphical viewer containing the structure model;
the Diagrams dialog box and the table presenting the
values of reactions.
NOTE: The table presents additional moving load cases
(marked with symbols “+” and “-“) determining the
value of the upper and lower envelope, respectively.

Selects load case 4 (moving crane load).

Select: 4 moving load

Switch on the My Moment option in Selects the presentation of the bending moment in the
the Diagrams dialog box structure for the selected moving load case.

Select the Deformation tab in the Selects the presentation of the deformation in the structure
Diagrams dialog box for the selected moving load case.
switch on the Deformation option

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 75


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Apply Presents the bending moment diagram and deformation


diagram for the structure. Similarly, one can present the
diagrams of other quantities available in the Diagrams
dialog box.

Loads / Select case component Opens the Case component dialog box

LMC the Animation button Opens the Animation dialog box

LMC the Start button Starts recording the animation of the bending moment and
deformation for the structure

Stops recording the animation


Stop (LMC the button) and
close the animation toolbar

Close Closes the Load component dialog box

Switch off the My Moment option in


the Diagrams dialog box

Select the Deformation tab in the


Diagrams dialog box
switch off the Deformation option,
Apply

6.5 Influence Lines

LMC in the Robot Millennium layout Goes to the START layout of the Robot Millennium
selection field program.
Structure model / Start

Results / Advanced / Influence line Opens the Influence lines dialog box

On the NTM tab of the Influence Selects for presentation: the bending moment and the shear
lines dialog box, switch on the two force for the moving load case
options: My and Fz

LMC in the Element field and type {8} Selects the bar for which the program will present influence
lines. The point position (equal 0.5) means that the
influence line will be created for the point located in the
middle of the bar length.

Apply Opens an additional window presenting the influence lines


of the selected quantities (see the figure below).

In the Nodes tab of the Influence Selects the presentation of nodal displacements for the
lines dialog box, switch on the two moving load case.
options: Ux and Uz

LMC in the Node field and type {2} Selects the node for which the program will present
influence lines.

Switch on the Open in a new window The diagrams of influence lines for the node no. 2 will be
option presented in a new window.

76 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Apply Opens an additional window where the influence lines of the


selected quantities will be presented.

RMC in the Influence lines dialog Opens the context menu


box where the influence lines are
presented for node 2

Add coordinates If the option is selected, the table located under the
diagrams of influence lines will display additional columns
containing the coordinates of the successive structure
points.

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 77


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

7. 3D Workshop with a Moving Crane


This example presents definition, analysis and design of a simple steel workshop illustrated
in the figure below.
Data units: (ft) and (kip).

Five load cases have been assigned to structure and three of them are shown in the drawings below.

LOAD CASE 2 LOAD CASE 4 LOAD CASE 5

The following rules apply during structure definition:


• any icon symbol means that the relevant icon is pressed with the left mouse button,
• ( x ) stands for selection of the ‘x’ option in the dialog box or entering the ‘x’ value,
• LMC and RMC - abbreviations for the Left Mouse button Click and the Right Mouse button Click.
To run structure definition start the Robot Millennium program (press the appropriate icon or select
the command from the taskbar). The vignette window will be displayed on the screen and the icon

(Frame 3D Design), the last but one in the first row, should be selected.

NOTE: The American section database (AISC) has been used in this example.

78 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

7.1 Definition of the Structure Model

Definition of Structure Bars

PERFORMED OPERATION DESCRIPTION

Selects the BARS layout from the list of the available Robot
Millennium layouts.
Structure Model/Bars

LMC on the Bar Type field and select Selects bar properties. The section from the American
Column section database (AISC) has been used.
LMC on the Section field and select Note: If the W 21x101 section is not available on the list,
(W 21x101) one should select the STRUCTURE MODEL /
SECTION and MATERIALS layout, press the New
icon in the Sections dialog box and add the section to
the list of active sections.

LMC on the Beginning field Starts definition of bars in the structure (structure column).
(background color changes to green)

Enter the following coordinates in the Defines a column of the structure.


Beginning and End field:
(-26,0,0) (-26,0,22.5), Add
(-26,0,22.5) (-26,0,45), Add

LMC on the Bar Type field in the Starts definition of a beam and selects its properties.
Bars dialog box and select Beam The section from the American section database (AISC) has
LMC on the Section field and select: been used.
(W 16x40) Note: If the W16x40 section is not available on the list, one
should follow the above procedure.

LMC on the Beginning field Starts definition of a beam in the structure.


(background color changes to green)

Enter the following points in the Defines a beam.


Beginning and End field:
(-26,0,32) (-20,0,32), Add

LMC on the Bar Type field in the Starts definition of a simple bar and selects its properties.
Bars dialog box and select Simple The section from the American section database (AISC) has
bar been used.
LMC on the Section field and select
C 15x50

LMC on the Beginning field Starts definition of a simple bar in the structure.
(background color changes to green)

Enter the following points in the Defines a simple bar.


Beginning and End field:
(-26,0,26) (-20,0,32), Add

LMC the Bar type field in the Bars Starts to define the bar and assign the properties to it.
dialog box, select Simple bar NOTE: If the section HP 10x57 is not present on the list of
LMC the Section field, select HP available sections, then press the button and
10x57 next follow the steps mentioned above.

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 79


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

LMC the Beginning field (background Starts to define the bar coordinates in a structure.
color changes to green)

Enter the bar coordinates in the Defines a bar.


Beginning and End fields:
(-26,0,45) (0,0,52), Add

Restores the initial structure view.

Bracket Definition

LMC the field for selection of the Selects the initial layout of the Robot Millennium program.
Robot Millennium program layouts.
Structure Model / Start

Geometry / Additional Attributes / Opens the Brackets dialog box that is used to define nodal
Brackets brackets for structure bars.

Opens the New Bracket dialog box.

In the Length (L) field enter the value Defines the bracket length
0.15; leave the remaining
parameters unchanged

Add, Close Defines a new bracket, closes the New Bracket dialog box

LMC the Bars field, move to the Selects a bar to which a bracket will be assigned.
graphical viewer and select the
recently-defined bar (number 5
should be displayed in the Bars field)

Apply, Close Assigns the bracket to the selected bar, closes the
Brackets dialog box. The structure defined is displayed in
the drawing below.

80 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Definition of Structure Supports

LMC on the field for selection of the Selects the Robot Millennium layout which allows defining
Robot Millennium program layouts supports.
Structure Model/Supports

In the Supports dialog box, LMC on Selects structure nodes for which supports will be defined.
the Current Selection field on the
Nodal tab (the cursor is blinking in
the field)

Switch to the graphic viewer; The selected node 1 will be entered to the Current Selection
pressing the left mouse button select field.
the lower column node by means of
the window

From the Supports dialog box select Selects the support type.
the fixed support icon (the icon will
be highlighted)

Apply The selected support type will be assigned to the chosen


structure nodes.

LMC on the field for the selection of Selects the initial Robot Millennium program layout.
the Robot Millennium program
layout
Structure Model/Start

CTRL+A Selects all nodes and bars.

Edit / Edit / Vertical Mirror Mirrors selected bars.

Locate graphically the vertical Performs the axial symmetry of selected bars and closes
symmetry axis (x = 0), LMC, Close the Vertical Mirror dialog box.

Once this option is selected the initial view of the structure


will be presented.
The defined structure is shown in the drawing below.

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 81


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Definition of Structure Loads

LMC on the Robot Millennium Selects the Robot Millennium program layout that allows
layout selection field defining structure loads.
Structure Model/Loads

LMC on the New button in the Load Defines a dead load (self-weight) with a standard name
Types dialog box. DL1.

LMC on the Nature field Selects the load case type: wind.
(Wind) NOTE: If the load case number is not changed
automatically, enter number (2) manually
LMC on the New button Defines two cases of wind load with the standard names:
LMC on the New button WIND1 and WIND2.

LMC on the Nature field Selects the load case type: snow.
(Snow)

LMC on the New button Defines a snow load with a standard name SN1.

Note: The self-weight load was automatically applied to all


structure bars (in the “Z” direction).

LMC on the second field in the Case Defines loads for the second load case.
column of the Loads table, select the
2nd load case: WIND1 from the list

LMC on the field in the Load Type Selects the load type.
column, select the (uniform load)
load type

LMC on the field in the List column, Selects the column to which the uniform load will be applied.
select the left column in a graphical
way

LMC on the field in the "px=" column Selects the direction and value of the uniform load.
and enter the value: (0.15)

LMC on the third field in the Case Defines another load for the second load case.
column, select the 2nd load case
WIND1 from the list

LMC on the field in the List column, Selects bars to which the uniform load will be applied.
select the right column graphically

LMC on the field in the "px=" column Selects the direction and value of the uniform load.
and enter the value: (0.10)

LMC on the fourth field in the Case Defines loads for the third load case.
column, select the 4th load case:
SN1 from the list

LMC on the field in the Load Type Selects the load type.
column, select the (uniform load)
load type

82 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

LMC on the field in the List column, Selects bars to which the uniform load will be applied.
select the beams of the steel girder
graphically

LMC on the field in the " PZ =" Selects the direction and value of the uniform load.
column and enter the value: (-0.75)

LMC in the View viewer

CTRL + A Selects all structure bars.

While the graphic viewer with the Opens the Translation dialog box.
structure model is active, select Edit /
Edit / Translate

LMC on the field (dX, dY, dZ), Defines the translation vector.
(0,40,0)

LMC on the Number of Repetitions Defines a number of repetitions for the performed
field translation operations.
(3)

Execute, Close Translates the structure and closes the Translation dialog
box (proceed to the next step to see changes).

View / Projection / 3d xyz Selects the isometric structure view (see the drawing
below).

Once this option is selected the initial view of the structure


will be presented.
The defined structure is presented in the drawing below.

Definition of Additional Elements of the Structure (Longitudinal Beams, Bracings, Crane Girder)

Longitudinal Beams - Definition

LMC on the field for selection of the Selects the Robot Millennium layout that allows defining
Robot Millennium program bars.
layouts
Structure Model/Bars

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 83


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

View /Display Opens the Display dialog box

On the Structure tab switch off the Switches off display of node numbers, bar numbers and
options: Node numbers and Bar symbols of bar sections, closes the Display dialog box
numbers
On the Sections tab switch off the
Symbols option, Apply, OK

LMC on the Bar Type field in the Selects bar properties. The section from the American
Bars dialog box and select: Beam section database (AISC) has been used.
LMC on the Section field and select
(HP 10x42)

LMC on the Beginning field Starts definition of bars in the structure.


(background color changes to
green)

Enter the following coordinates in Defines longitudinal beams as shown in the drawing
the Beginning and End field: below.
(26,0,45) (26,40,45), Add
(26,40,45) (26,80,45), Add
(26,80,45) (26,120,45), Add

Switch to the graphic viewer; RMC in


any place in the viewer, which opens
the context menu. Chose the Select
option and sort out three recently
defined bars - while the CTRL key is
pressed LMC on three beams

While the graphic viewer with the Opens the Translation dialog box.
structure model is active, select Edit /
Edit / Translate

LMC on the field (dX, dY, dZ), Defines the translation vector.
(0,0,-22.5)

Execute Translates the structure and highlights translated beams.

LMC on the field (dX, dY, dZ), Defines a new translation vector.
(-52,0,0)

84 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Execute Translates beams and highlights translated beams.

LMC on the field (dX, dY, dZ), Defines a new translation vector.
(0,0,22.5)

Execute Translates the structure and highlights translated beams.

LMC on the field (dX, dY, dZ), Defines a new translation vector.
(26,0,7)

Execute, Close Translates the structure and closes the Translation dialog
box. The defined structure is presented in the drawing
below.

Bracing - Definition

LMC in the Bar Type field and select: Selects bar properties.
Simple bar
LMC on the Section field and select
(W 12x305)

LMC on the Beginning field Defines bracing.


(background color changes to green)
(26,40,0) (26,80,22.5), Add
(26,40,22.5) (26,80,0), Add

LMC on the field for selection of the Selects the initial layout of the Robot Millennium program.
Robot Millennium program layouts
Structure Model / Start

Select the two recently defined bars -


while the CTRL key is pressed LMC
on two bars

Edit / Edit / Translate Opens the Translation dialog box.

LMC on the field (dX, dY, dZ), Defines the translation vector.
(0,0,22.5), Execute

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 85


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

LMC on the graphic viewer; open the


context menu clicking RMC on any
point in the viewer. Choose the
Select option (the context menu will
close then); select all the recently
defined bracings – with the CTRL
key pressed, LMC on the four bars

LMC on the field (dX, dY, dZ) in the Defines the translation vector.
Translation dialog box,
(-52,0,0)

Execute, Close Translates bars and closes the Translation dialog box.

LMC on the field for selection of the Selects the Robot Millennium layout that allows defining
Robot Millennium program layouts bars.
Structure Model/Bars

LMC on the Bar Type field and Selects bar properties.


select: Simple bar
LMC on the Section field and select
(W 12x305)

LMC on the Beginning field Defines bracing.


(background color changes to green)
(26,40,45) (0,80,52), Add
(0,40,52) (26,80,45), Add
(-26,40,45) (0,80,52), Add
(-26,80,45) (0,40,52), Add

Crane Girder - Definition

Opens the Sections dialog box.

Opens the New Section dialog box.

Defines a user section: I-ASYM_1


Select the icon on the
Parametric tab

86 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

On the Dimension tab enter: Defines dimensions of the user section.


b1 = 15.0, h = 22.0, b2 = 10.0,
tw = 0.5, tf1 = 0.5, tf2 = 0.5
Add, Close

Close Closes the Sections dialog box

Opens the Bars dialog box

LMC on the Bar Type field and Selects bar properties.


select: Beam
LMC on the Section field and select
(I-ASYM_1)

LMC on the Beginning field Defines a crane girder.


(background color changes to green)
(20,0,32) (20,120,32), Add

LMC on the field for selection of the Selects the initial layout of the Robot Millennium program.
Robot Millennium program layouts
Structure Model / Start

LMC on the View edit viewer;


Select the recently defined bar

Edit / Edit / Translate Opens the Translation dialog box.

LMC on the field (dX, dY, dZ), Defines the translation vector.
(-40,0,0)

Execute, Close Translates bars and closes the Translation dialog box.

Definition of Additional Loads

LMC in the Robot Millennium layout Selects the Robot Millennium program layout that allows
selection field defining structure loads.
Structure Model/Loads

LMC on the fifth field in the Case Defines loads for the fourth load case.
column, select the 3rd load case:
WIND2 from the list

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 87


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

LMC on the field in the Load Type Selects the load type.
column, select the (uniform load)
load type

LMC on the field in the List column, Selects columns to which the uniform load will be applied.
select the corner columns

LMC on the field in the "py=" column Selects the direction and value of the uniform load.
and enter the value: (0.90)

LMC in the View viewer The defined load is presented in the drawing below.

Definition of the Moving Load Applied to the Crane Girder

Tools / Job Preferences / Databases/ Open the Job Preferences dialog box.
Vehicle Database

Pressing the Create new database icon results in opening


the New moving load dialog box.

Enter:
in the Database field: User
in the Database name field:
User-defined database
in the Database description field:
User-defined vehicles
in the Internal units of the database
select: (kip) as Force units and (ft) as
Length units

Create Creates a new database and closes the New moving load
dialog box.

OK Closes the Job Preferences dialog box.

Loads / Special loads / Moving Opens the Moving loads dialog box.

Opens the Moving loads dialog box and starts defining


a new vehicle.

On the Symmetric vehicles tab LMC Opens the New vehicle dialog box.
on the New button

88 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Enter the vehicle name: Moving Defines the name of the new vehicle, closes the New
crane vehicle dialog box.
OK

LMC the first line in the table located Defines acting forces.
in the lower part of the dialog box

Select the load type: concentrated Selects a load type.


force

F = 5.0, X = 0.0, S = 40 Defines the value and location of the concentrated force.

LMC the second line in the table Defines operating forces.


located in the lower part of the dialog
box

Select the load type: concentrated Selects a load type.


force

F = 5.0, X = 4.0, S = 40 Defines the value and location of the concentrated force.

LMC the Save to database button Opens the Moving load databases dialog box.

OK in the Moving load databases Saves the defined vehicle to the user-defined database.
dialog box

Add, Close Adds the defined vehicle to the list of active vehicles and
closes the Moving loads dialog box.

In the Name field, enter the name of Defines the name of the moving load.
the moving load (case number 5)
Moving crane

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 89


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

LMC the Define button Starts defining the route of the Moving Crane vehicle: the
Polyline - Contour dialog box is opened. Activate the Line
option.

In the Geometry dialog box define Defines the vehicle route.


two points determining the route of
the moving load:
Point P1(0,0,32)
Point P2 (0,120,32)

Apply, Close Closes the Polyline - Contour dialog box.

LMC the Step field {8} Defines the step of a position change for the moving load
Assume the default value of load and the direction of load application.
direction (0,0,-1) which means that
the load will operate in the Z direction
and its sense will be opposite to Z
axis sense

LMC the Automatic option located in Selects the plane of load application.
the Application Plane field

LMC the Parameters button Opens the Route Parameters dialog box.

LMC the fields for the LR and LL Defines the factors for the forces operating along the
factors and enter the value 0.1 vehicle movement route. It generates the forces originating
in vehicle braking, whose value equals 0.1*F.

Activate the following options: Switching these options on assures that the forces defining
Vehicle position limit – route the load will not be positioned off the route limits defining the
beginning Vehicle position limit – movement of the moving load.
route end

OK Closes the Route Parameters dialog box.

Apply, Close Generates the moving load case according to the adopted
parameters and closes the Moving loads dialog box.

7.2 Structure Analysis

Tools / Job Preferences Opens the Job Preferences dialog box

Structure Analysis Selects the Structure Analysis option from the tree in the
dialog box

Method of Solving the System of Selects the iterative method of solving the equation system
Equations: Iterative for the defined structure

Switch off the option Automatic Switches off freezing of structure calculation results.
freezing of results of structure
calculations

OK Accepts assumed parameters and closes the Job


Preferences dialog box

90 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Starts calculations of the defined structure. Once the


calculations are completed, the title bar of the viewer will
present the following information: Finite Elements Results -
available.

Presentation of the Vehicle and the Moving Load Case

View / Display Opens the Display dialog box.

In the Loads tab: switch on the Presents the defined vehicle on the structure.
Moving loads - vehicle option, Apply

Selects the load case: 5 (Moving crane).

Loads / Select Case Component Opens the Case Component dialog box.

Select: Current component 5 Selects the component 5 of the moving load case.

LMC the Animation button Opens the Animation dialog box.

LMC the Start button Starts the animation of the moving load applied to the
structure; the vehicle will move along the defined route.

Stops the vehicle animation.


Stop (LMC the button) and close
the animation toolbar
Close Closes the Case Component dialog box.

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 91


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

LMC on the field for selection of the The RESULTS layout of the Robot Millennium program
Robot Millennium program layouts will be opened. The screen will be divided into three parts:
Results/Results a graphic viewer containing the structure model, the
Diagrams dialog box and a table with reaction values.

Selects the load case: 5 (Moving crane).

Select the Deformation tab in the Selects presentation of deformation for the selected moving
Diagrams dialog box, turn on the load case.
Deformation option

Apply Presents the deformation diagram for the structure.


Similarly, the diagrams of other quantities available in the
Diagrams dialog box can be presented.

Loads / Select Case Component Opens the Case Component dialog box.

LMC the Animation button Opens the Animation dialog box.

LMC the Start button Starts animation of deformation for the structure.

Stop (LMC the button) and close Stops the animation.

the animation toolbar

Close Closes the Animation dialog box.

Select the Deformation tab in the


Diagrams dialog box
Turn off the Deformation option,
Apply

7.3 Structure Design


Code: LRFD:2000

LMC on the field for selection of the Starts steel member design. The screen will be divided into
Robot Millennium program layouts three parts: a graphic viewer containing the structure model,
Structure Design/Steel/Aluminum the Definitions dialog box and the Calculations dialog box.
Design

LMC on the List button located Opens the Member Selection dialog box.
beside the Member Verification field
in the Calculations dialog box

Enter the member numbers: 1, 2, 6, Selects members for verification.


7 (columns) in the field located above
the Previous button, Close (see the
figure below)

92 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

LMC on the Load Case Selection Opens the Load Case Selection dialog box.
button in the Calculations dialog box

LMC on the All button, Close Selects all load cases.

LMC on the Calculations button Starts verification of the selected structure members;
the Member Verification dialog box shown below will be
displayed on the screen.

LMC on the line containing simplified Opens the Results dialog box for the selected member.
results for member no. 2

LMC on the Simplified Results tab Displays design results for member no. 2 (see the dialog
box presented below).

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 93


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

OK Closes the Results dialog box.

Close Closes the Member Verification dialog box.

LMC the New button on the Groups Allows definition of the first member group.
tab in the Definitions – LRFD:2000
dialog box

Define the first group with the Defines the first group consisting of all columns in the
following parameters: structure
Number: 1
Name: Columns
Member list: LMC on the View edit
viewer; select all columns while the
CTRL key is pressed
Material: STEEL Carbon Fy 36 ksi

Save Saves the parameters of the first member group.

Switch to the graphic viewer, select - Once this option is selected, the structure is displayed in 3D
from the upper menu: view, but it is set in such a way so that the structure is
View / Projection / Zx 3d visible only on the ZX plane.

LMC the New button on the Groups Allows defining the second member group.
tab in the Definitions dialog box

Define the second group with the Defines the second group consisting of all bars belonging to
following parameters: both trusses in the structure.
Number: 2
Name: Rafters
Material: STEEL Carbon Fy 36 ksi

94 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

LMC in the Member list in the Selects all bars of the steel girder.
Definition dialog box, switch to the
graphic viewer and select all rafters
by means of a window

View / Projection / Zx 3d Once this option is selected, a 3D view of the structure is


displayed.
Note: apart from the rafters, other bars have been selected
(bracings and longitudinal beams). To perform the
selection correctly, bars which are not rafter elements
should be separated, while the CTRL key is pressed.

Save Saves the parameters of the second member group.

LMC the List button in the Code Opens the Code Group Selection dialog box.
group design line in the Calculations
dialog box

LMC the All button (in the field above Selects member groups to be designed.
the Previous button), the list: 1 2 will
appear there, Close

LMC the Load Case Selection Opens the Load case selection dialog box.
button in the Calculations dialog box

LMC the All button (in the field above Selects all load cases, closes the Load case selection
the Previous button), Close dialog box.

Activate the options: Optimization


and Limit state: Ultimate

Press the Options button and Opens the Optimization Options dialog box; it will result in
Activate the Weight option finding the section with the smallest weight during the
optimization process.

OK Closes the Optimization Options dialog box.

LMC the Calculation button Starts design of the selected member groups; the Short
results dialog box appears on the screen (see the drawing
below).

LMC the Change All button in the Changes the currently used sections in the members
LRFD:2000 - Code Group Design belonging to both member groups to the calculated sections
dialog box shown above (for columns: from W 21x101 to W 12x58, for rafters: from
HP 10x42 to HP 12x53).

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 95


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Close Closes the Code Group Design dialog box.

Recalculates the structure with the changed member


sections. Once calculations are finished, the following
information will be displayed in the Robot top bar: Results
(FEM): available
LMC the Calculations button in the Starts design of selected member groups; the Short results
Calculations dialog box dialog box appears on the screen (see the drawing below).
Keep on repeating the calculations until the optimal sections
are obtained.

Close Closes the Code Group Design dialog box.

Close the Member Verification and


the Results dialog boxes

7.4 Influence Lines

LMC in the field for selection of the Activates the START layout of the Robot Millennium
Robot Millennium program layouts program.
Structure Model / Start

Results / Advanced / Influence line Opens the Influence lines dialog box.

On the NTM tab of the Influence Selects the My bending moment for a moving load case for
Lines dialog box, switch on the My presentation.
option

LMC in the Element field and choose Selects the bar for which the program will present influence
the right crane girder (bar no. 68) lines.

In the Point field set the Point The point position (equal to 0.25) means that the influence
position at 0.25 line will be created for the point at one fourth of the bar
length.

Selects the 5th load case from the load case list.
Note: The influence lines can be created only for a moving
load case.

Apply Opens another window presenting the influence lines for the
selected quantities.

96 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

RMC in the Influence lines viewer Opens the context menu.


where the influence lines are
presented for the right crane girder

Add coordinates If the option is selected, the table located under the
diagrams of influence lines will display additional columns
containing the coordinates of the successive structure
points (see the figure below).

On the NTM tab of the Influence Selects the shear force for a moving load case for
Line dialog box, switch off the My presentation.
option; activate the Fz option

LMC in the Open a new window Opens a new window for presentation of influence lines.
option
Apply

RMC in the Influence lines viewer Opens the context menu.


where the influence lines are
presented for the right crane girder

Add coordinates If the option is selected, the table located under the
diagrams of influence lines will display additional columns
containing the coordinates of the successive structure
points (see the figure below).

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 97


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

98 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

8. 3D Bridge with a Moving Load


This example presents definition, analysis and design of a single-span bottom-road bridge shown in
the figure below.
Data units: (ft) and (kip).

Eight load cases have been assigned to the structure and six of them are displayed in the drawings
below.

LOAD CASE 2 - LL1

LOAD CASE 3 - LL2


LOAD CASE 4 - LL3 vertical mirror of LOAD CASE 3

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 99


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

LOAD CASE 5 - WIND1

LOAD CASE 6 - WIND2

LOAD CASE 7 - Moving vehicle

100 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

LOAD CASE 8 - Moving uniform load

The following rules apply during structure definition:


• any icon symbol means that the relevant icon is pressed with the left mouse button,
• ( x ) stands for selection of the ‘x’ option in the dialog box or entering the ‘x’ value,
• LMC and RMC - abbreviations for the Left Mouse button Click and the Right Mouse button Click.

To run structure definition start the Robot Millennium program (press the appropriate icon or select
the command from the taskbar). The vignette window will be displayed on the screen and the icon

in the second row (Shell Design) should be selected.

NOTE: The American section database (AISC) has been used in this example.

8.1 Definition of the Structure Model

8.1.1 Definition of Structure Geometry

Bridge Floor - Definition

PERFORMED OPERATION DESCRIPTION

View / Projection / Xy Once this option is selected the structure is set on the XY
plane.

Geometry / Object / Polyline - Opens the Polyline - Contour dialog box which allows
contour defining various line types.

LMC in the Geometry button Opens the dialog box which allows defining a contour.

Enter the following coordinates into Defines a contour.


the field highlighted in green:
(0,0,0) Add,
(98,0,0) Add,
(98,13,0) Add,
(0,13,0) Add,
Apply, Close

Presentation of the structure initial view.

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 101


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Geometry / Panels Opens the Panel dialog box that allows defining panels
within structures.

LMC in the button located on Opens the New Thickness dialog box.
the right side of the Thickness field

Set the new thickness value: 9 in. Defines a new panel and closes the dialog box.
and enter the new name
TH9_CONCR,
Add, Close

LMC the button located to the Opens the Reinforcement Parameters dialog box.
right of the Reinforcement field

On the General tab in the Main Selects the direction of main reinforcement
Reinforcement Direction field select
the Along Y axis option

Into the Name field enter Assigns the name to the new reinforcement type,
Direction_Y, closes the Reinforcement Parameters dialog box
Add, Close

LMC in the Reinforcement field Defines reinforcement type that will be applied to the
and set Direction Y reinforcement defined panel.

LMC in the Internal Point field and Applies current properties to the selected panel.
select a point inside the panel by
left-clicking on it

Close Closes the Panel dialog box.

View / Projection / 3D xyz Once this option is selected, a 3D view of the structure is
displayed. The defined structure is displayed in the
drawing below.

Support Definition

View / Display Opens the Display dialog box which is used to select
structure attributes for presentation.

On the Finite elements tab switch off Stops presentation of panel numbers and descriptions.
the Numbers and panel description
option, OK

102 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

LMC on the field for selection of the Selects the Robot Millennium layout which allows defining
Robot Millennium program layouts supports.
Structure Model/Supports

In the Supports dialog box select the Selects the support type.
fixed support icon (the icon will be
highlighted)

In the Supports dialog box on the


Linear tab LMC on the Current
Selection field

Switch to the graphic viewer; Assigns fixed supports to two shorter edges of the structure.
pressing the left mouse button select
two shorter edges of the structure,
Apply

LMC on the field for selection of the Selects the initial Robot Millennium layout.
Robot Millennium program layouts
Structure Model/Geometry

View / Display Opens the Display dialog box, which allows selecting
structure attributes for presentation.

On the Structure tab in the Display Displays symbols of structure supports on the screen,
dialog box activate Supports - closes the Display dialog box.
symbols, Apply, OK The defined structure is displayed in the drawing below.

Definition of Bridge Trusses (Application of Library Structures)

Opens the Typical Structures dialog box that allows


defining typical structures (structure elements).

On the Structure Database Selection In the Typical Structures dialog box a new Structure
field select the Library of typical Selection field appears. Opening of the Trapezoid Truss
structures - beams, frames, trusses Type 3 dialog box.
option.

LMC (twice) the icon


the last one in the third row

In the Dimension tab LMC the Defines length of the lower truss chord (it may be defined
Length L1 field graphically in the graphical viewer).
{98)

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 103


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

On the Dimension tab LMC the Defines length of the upper truss chord (it may be defined
Length L2 field graphically in the graphical viewer).
{90)

LMC the Height H field Defines truss height (it may be defined graphically in the
{15} graphical viewer).

LMC the Number of Fields Defines a number of fields into which the truss will be
{10} divided.

On the Dimensions tab in the Applies divided chords to the structure.


Continuous chord field activate
option No

On the Insert tab LMC the Insertion Defines the insertion point for the truss; the defined
Point, select coordinates: (0,0,0) structure is displayed in the drawing below.

Apply, OK Creates the defined structure at the indicated point within


the construction and closes the Merge Structure dialog
box.

Opens the Sections dialog box.

LMC in the Line/Bars field, switch to Selects truss bars.


the graphic viewer and select all bars
belonging to trusses

LMC in the S 15x50 section Selects the section which will be applied to the chosen bars.
Note: If the S 15x50 section is not available on the list, one
should press the icon located in the upper part of the
Sections dialog box. It opens the New Section dialog box.
On the Standard tab in the Section Selection field chose the
following options:
- Database - AISC
- Family - S
- Section - S 15x50
Pressing the Add button will result in adding the S 15x50
section to the list of available sections. Pressing the Close
button will result in closing the New Section dialog box.

104 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Apply, accept the material change to Attributes S 15x50 section to the selected structure bars,
the default one, closes the Sections dialog box.
Close

Switch to the graphic viewer and Selects all truss bars.


select all truss bars

Edit / Edit / Translate Opens the Translation dialog box.

LMC on the field (dX, dY, dZ), Defines a new translation vector.
(0,13,0)

Execute, Close Translates beams, highlights translated beams and closes


the Translation dialog box. The defined structure is
displayed in the drawing below.

Bracing Definition

LMC in the box for selection of the Selects the BARS layout from the list of available Robot
Robot Millennium program layouts Millennium layouts, which allows defining bars.
Structure Model / Bars

LMC in the Bar Type field and select: Defines bar properties. The section from the American
Simple bar, section database (AISC) has been used.
LMC in the Section field and select
(DL 2x2x0.25)

LMC in the Beginning and End fields Defines bracing.


(background color changes to green)
(4,0,15) (14,13,15), Add
(4,13,15) (14,0,15), Add

RMC in any point within the graphic Selects two recently defined bars.
viewer which opens the context
menu. Choose the Select option and
indicate two recently defined bars,
while the CTRL key is pressed.

Edit / Edit / Translate Opens the Translation dialog box.

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 105


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

LMC in the field (dX, dY, dZ) Defines the translation vector and allows defining the
(10,0,0), number of repetitions.
in the Number of Repetitions field
{8}

Execute, Close Translates the structure, highlights translated bars and


closes the Translation dialog box.

LMC in the field for selection of the Selects the initial Robot Millennium layout. The defined
Robot Millennium program layouts structure is displayed in the drawing below.
Structure Model/Geometry

Cross Beams - Definition

LMC on the box for selection of the Selects the BARS layout from the list of available Robot
Robot Millennium program layouts Millennium layouts, which allows defining bars.
Structure Model / Bars

LMC in the Bar Type field and select: Defines bar properties. The section from the American
Simple bar section database (AISC) has been used.
LMC in the Section field and select Note: If the MC 12x50 section is not available on the list,
(MC 12x50). one should select Structure Model / Properties,

press the icon and add the section to the list of


active sections.

LMC in the Beginning and End fields Defines cross beams.


(background color changes to green)
(4,0,15) (4,13,15), Add

RMC in any point within the graphic Selects the recently defined bar.
viewer, which opens the context
menu. Chose the Select option and
indicate the recently defined bar.

Edit / Edit / Translate Opens the Translation dialog box.

LMC in the field (dX, dY, dZ) Defines a translation vector and allows defining a number of
(10,0,0) repetitions.
in the Number of Repetitions field
{9}

106 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Execute, Close Translates the structure and closes the Translation dialog
box.

LMC in the field for selection of the Selects the initial Robot Millennium layout. The defined
Robot Millennium program layouts structure is displayed in the drawing below.
Structure Model / Geometry

8.1.2 Load Definition

LMC in the Robot Millennium layout Selects the Robot Millennium program layout that allows
selection field defining structure loads.
Structure Model / Loads

LMC in the New button in the Load Defines a dead load with the standard name DL1.
Types dialog box

LMC in the Nature field: (Live) Selects the type of a load case: live.

LMC on the New button Defines two cases of live load with the standard names:
LMC on the New button LL1, LL2 and LL3.
LMC on the New button

LMC on the Nature field: (Wind) Selects the type of a load case: wind.

LMC on the New button Defines two cases of wind load with standard names:
LMC on the New button WIND1 and WIND2.

Note: The self-weight load has been automatically applied to


all structure bars (in the “Z” direction).

Opens the Load Definition dialog box.


LMC on the icon on the Bar
Loads toolbar

In the Load Definition dialog box Opens the Uniform Planar Load dialog box
select Surface tab and press the

icon

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 107


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Selects the load case: Live Load 1.

In the Values Z: field enter -0.6 Defines a value of the uniform load acting on surface FEs in
the direction of the Z axis of the global coordinate system.

Add Closes the Uniform Planar Load dialog box.

In the Apply To field enter 1 Displays the current selection of structure panel.

Apply Applies predefined load to a chosen panel.

In the Load Definition dialog box Opens the Uniform Planar Load (contour) dialog box.

select Surface tab and press

Selects load case: Live Load 2.

In the Values Z: field enter -0.5 Defines a value of the uniform load acting on surface FEs in
the direction of the Z axis of the global coordinate system.

LMC on the Contour Definition Opens the dialog box that allows defining the contour to
button which the load is applied. It may be performed either in the
dialog box or graphically on the screen.

In the green field enter coordinates Defines the contour to which the loads will be applied.
that define a contour:
(0,0,0), Add
(98,0,0), Add
(98,3,0), Add
(0,3,0), Add

Add Closes the Uniform Planar Load (contour) dialog box.

In the Apply To field enter 1 Displays the current selection of structure panel.

Apply Applies predefined load to a chosen panel.

In the Load Definition dialog box Opens the Uniform Planar Load (contour) dialog box.
select the Surface tab and press the

icon

108 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Selects load case: Live Load 3.

In the Values Z: field enter -0.5 Defines a value of the uniform load acting on surface FE in
the direction of the Z global coordinate system.

LMC on the Contour Definition Opens dialog box that allows defining the contour, to which
button the load will be applied. It may be performed either in the
dialog box or graphically on the screen.

In the green field enter coordinates Defines contour to which the loads will be applied.
that define a contour:
(0,10,0), Add
(98,10,0), Add
(98,13,0), Add
(0,13,0), Add

Add Closes the Uniform Planar Load (contour) dialog box.

In the field Apply To type 1 Displays the current selection of structure panel.

Apply, Close Applies the predefined load to a chosen panel, closes the
Uniform Planar Load (contour) dialog box.

View / Projection / Zx Once this option is selected, the Zx plane is chosen.

LMC on the fifth field in the Case Defines loads for the fifth load case.
column, select 5th load case: WIND1
from the list

LMC on the field in the Load Type Selects the load type.
column, select (nodal force) from the
list as a load type

LMC on the field in the List column, Selects nodes to which nodal force will be applied.
select all nodes of the front truss in a
graphic way

LMC on the field in the "FY=" column Selects the direction and value of the nodal force load.
and enter the value: (0.90)

LMC on the fifth field in the Case Defines loads for the sixth load case.
column, select 6th load case: WIND2
from the list

LMC on the field in the Load Type Selects the load type.
column, select (nodal force) from the
list as a load type

LMC on the field in the List column, Selects nodes to which nodal force will be applied.
select four left nodes belonging to
both trusses

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 109


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

LMC on the field in the "FX=" column Selects the direction and value of the nodal force load.
and enter the value: (0.60)

8.1.3 Definition of the Moving Load Applied to the Bridge Floor

LMC in the box for selection of the Selects the initial Robot Millennium layout.
Robot Millennium program layouts
Structure Model / Geometry

Tools / Job preferences / Databases/ Open the Job preferences dialog box.
Vehicle Database

Pressing the Create new database icon results in opening


the New Moving Load dialog box.

Enter:
in the Database field: User
in the Database name field:
User-defined database
in the Database description field:
User-defined vehicles
in the Internal units of the database
chose (ft) as Length units and (kip)
as Force unit

Create Closes the New Moving Load dialog box.

OK Closes the Job Preferences dialog box.

Loads / Special loads / Moving Opens the Moving Loads dialog box.

Opens the Moving Loads dialog box and starts defining


a new vehicle.

On the Symmetric Vehicles tab LMC Defines a new vehicle.


on the New button

Enter the vehicle name: Vehicle 1, Defines the name of the new vehicle.
OK

LMC the first line in the table located Defines operating forces.
in the lower part of the dialog box

Select the load type: concentrated Selects a load type.


force

F = 13.5, X = 0.0, S = 1.75 Defines the value and location of the concentrated force.

LMC the second line in the table Defines operating forces.


located in the lower part of the dialog
box

Select the load type: concentrated Selects a load type.


force

110 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

F = 6.75, X = 11.75, S = 1.75 Defines the value and location of the concentrated force.

LMC the third line in the table located Defines operating forces.
in the lower part of the dialog box

Select the load type: concentrated Selects a load type.


force

F = 13.5,X = 15.75, S = 1.75 Defines the value and location of the concentrated force.

LMC the Save to database button Opens the Moving Load Databases dialog box.

Select User database and press the Saves the defined vehicle to the user-defined database.
OK button in the Moving load
databases dialog box

Add, Close Adds the defined vehicle to the list of active vehicles and
closes the Moving Loads dialog box.

In the Name field, enter the name of Defines a name of the moving load.
the moving load (case number 7)
Moving vehicle

LMC the Define button Starts defining the route of the Moving Crane vehicle; the
Polyline - Contour dialog box is opened. Activate the Line
option.

In the Geometry dialog box define Defines the vehicle route.


two points determining the route of
the moving load:
Point P1 (0,6.5,0)
Point P2 (98, 6.5,0)

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 111


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Apply, Close Closes the Polyline - Contour dialog box.

LMC the Step field: {8} Defines the step of a position change for the moving load
Assume the default value of load and the load application direction.
direction: (0,0,-1) which means that
the load will be operating in the Z
direction and its sense will be
opposite to the Z axis sense

LMC the Automatic option located in Selects the plane of load application.
the Application Plane field

Apply Generates the moving load case according to the adopted


parameters.

Opens the Moving Loads dialog box and starts defining


a new vehicle.

On the Symmetric vehicles tab LMC Defines a new vehicle.


on the New button

Type the vehicle name: Moving Defines the name of a new vehicle.
surface load
OK

LMC the first line in the table located Defines operating forces.
in the lower part of the dialog box

Select the load type: surface load Selects the load type.

P = 0.9, X = 0.0, S = 0.0, DX = 4.0, Defines the value and location of the surface load.
DY = 3.0

LMC the Save to database button Opens the Moving Load Databases dialog box.

Select the User database, OK in the Saves the defined vehicle to the user-defined database.
Moving load databases

Add, Close Adds the defined vehicle to the list of active vehicles and
closes the Moving Loads dialog box.

112 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

In the Name field, type the name of Defines the name of a moving load.
the moving load (case number: 8):
Moving surface load

LMC the Define button Starts defining the route of the Moving Crane vehicle: the
Polyline - Contour dialog box is opened. Activate the Line
option.

In the Geometry dialog box define Defines the vehicle route.


two points determining the route of
the moving load:
Point P1(0,1.5,0)
Point P2 (98,1.5,0)

Apply, Close Closes the Polyline - Contour dialog box.

LMC the Step field Defines the step of a position change for the moving load
{8} and the load application direction.
Assume the default value of load
direction: (0,0,-1) which means that
the load will be operating in the Z
direction and its sense will be
opposite to the Z axis sense

LMC the Automatic option located in Selects the plane of load application.
the Application Plane field

Apply, Close Generates a second moving load case according to the


adopted parameters and closes the Moving Loads dialog
box.

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 113


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

8.2 Structure Analysis


Tools / Job Preferences / Structure Opens the Job Preferences dialog box
Analysis

Switch off the option: Automatic Switches off freezing of structure calculations results,
freezing of results of structure closes the Job Preferences dialog box.
calculations,
OK

Starts calculations of the defined structure. Once the


calculations are completed, the title bar of the viewer will
present the following information: Finite Elements Results -
available.

8.2.1 Result Presentation in the Form of Maps

LMC on the box for selection of the The RESULTS layout of the Robot Millennium program
Robot Millennium program layouts will open. The screen will be divided into two parts: the
Results/Results - maps graphic viewer containing the structure model and the
Maps dialog box.

Selects the load case: 2 (LL1).

On the Detailed tab activate the z Activates visualization of the displacement for individual
option in the Displacement - u,w line surface FEs in the local coordinate system. These are the
displacements in the direction perpendicular to the element
surface.

Activate Maps option Allows presentation of results obtained for FE in the form of
maps.

Apply Presents the structure displacement.

Selects the load case: 7 (Moving vehicle).

114 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

On the Deformation tab switch on the Activates presenting deformation of the currently designed
Active option structure.

Apply Presents the structure displacement.

Loads / Select Case Component Opens the Case Component dialog box.

LMC the Animation button Opens the Animation dialog box.

LMC the Start button Starts performing the displacement animation for the
structure.

Stops the animation.


Stop (LMC the button) and close
the animation toolbar
Close Closes the Case component dialog box.

Switch off the options Displacement -


u,w and active in the Maps dialog
box

8.3 Structure Member Design

LMC on the box for selection of the Selects the BARS layout from the list of the available Robot
Robot Millennium program layouts Millennium layouts.
Structure Model / Bars

Switch to the graphic viewer and Opens the Member Type dialog box.
select from the upper menu:
Geometry / Code parameters /
Steel/Aluminium Member Type

Opens the Member Definitions - Parameters dialog box.

In the Buckling length coefficient Y Opens the Buckling Diagrams dialog box which allows
defining buckling length for members.
press the button

Select the last button in the second Applies the selected buckling diagram and appropriate
buckling length coefficient, closes the Buckling Diagrams
row , OK dialog box.

In the Buckling length coefficient Z Opens the Buckling Diagrams dialog box which allows
defining buckling length for members.
press the button

Select the last button in the second Applies selected buckling diagram and appropriate buckling
length coefficient, closes the Buckling Diagrams dialog
row , OK box.

In the Member Type field enter: Applies the name to a new bar type.
Chords

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 115


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Save, Close Saves current parameters for the Chord member type,
closes the Member Definitions - Parameters dialog box.

LMC on the Line/Bars option located Selects truss chords.


in the Member Type dialog box,
switch to the graphic viewer and
select all bars belonging to chords

Apply Applies current member type (Chords) to the selected truss


bars.

Opens the Member Definitions - Parameters dialog box.

In the Buckling length coefficient Y Opens the Buckling Diagrams dialog box which allows
defining buckling length for members.
press the button

Select the first button in the third row Applies the selected buckling diagram and appropriate
buckling length coefficient, closes the Buckling Diagrams
, OK dialog box.

In the Buckling length coefficient Z Opens the Buckling Diagrams dialog box which allows
defining buckling length for members.
press the button

Select the first button in the third row Applies the selected buckling diagram and appropriate
buckling length coefficient, closes the Buckling Diagrams
, OK dialog box.

In the Member Type field enter: Assigns the name to a new bar type.
Diagonals

Save, Close Saves current parameters for the Cross braces member
type, closes the Member Definitions - Parameters dialog
box.

LMC on the Line/Bars option located Selects cross braces in the trusses.
in the Member Type dialog box,
switch to the graphic viewer and
select all diagonals belonging to
trusses

Apply, Close Applies current member type (Diagonals) to the selected


truss bars, closes the Member Type dialog box.

8.3.1 Structure Design

Code LRFD:2000
Structure design / Steel/Aluminum Selects the STEEL/ALUMINUM DESIGN layout from the list
design of available Robot Millennium layouts.

116 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

In the Groups tab located in the Starts defining a new group.


Definitions dialog box press the
New button

Define the first group with the Defines the first group consisting of all bars belonging to the
following parameters: upper chords in the structure.
Number: 1
Name: Upper chords
Member list: LMC on the View edit
viewer; select all the bars of the
upper chords while the CTRL key is
pressed
Material: STEEL Carbon Fy 36 ksi

Save Saves the parameters of the first member group.

LMC the New button on the Groups Allows defining a second member group.
tab in the Definitions dialog box

Define the second group with the Defines the second group consisting of all bars belonging to
following parameters: the lower chords in the structure.
Number: 2
Name: Lower chords
Member list: LMC on the View edit
viewer; select all the bars of the
lower chords while the CTRL key is
pressed
Material: STEEL Carbon Fy 36 ksi

Save Saves the parameters of the second member group.

LMC the New button on the Groups Allows defining a third member group.
tab in the Definitions dialog box

Define the third group with the Defines the third group consisting of all diagonals belonging
following parameters: to trusses in the structure.
Number: 3
Name: Diagonals
Member list: LMC on the View edit
viewer; select all the diagonals
belonging to the trusses while the
CTRL key is pressed
Material: STEEL Carbon Fy 36 ksi

Save Saves the parameters of the third member group.

LMC the New button on the Groups Allows defining a fourth member group.
tab in the Definitions dialog box

Define the fourth group with the Defines the third group consisting of all bracings in the
following parameters: structure.
Number: 4
Name: Bracing
Member list: LMC on the View edit
viewer; select all the bracings in the
structure while the CTRL key is
pressed
Material: STEEL Carbon Fy 36 ksi

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 117


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Save Saves the parameters of the fourth member group.

LMC the New button on the Groups Allows defining a fifth member group.
tab in the Definitions dialog box

Define the fifth group with the Defines the fifth group consisting of all cross beams in the
following parameters: structure.
Number: 5
Name: Beams
Member list: LMC on the View edit
viewer; select all cross beams while
the CTRL key is pressed
Material: STEEL Carbon Fy 36 ksi

Save Saves the parameters of the third member group.

In the Calculations – LRFD:2000 Activates design in groups.


dialog box switch on the Code Group
Design option

LMC on the List button in the Code Opens the Code Group Selection dialog box.
group design line in the Calculations
dialog box

Press the All button located in the Selects member groups to be designed, closes the Code
upper part of the Code Group Group Selection dialog box.
Selection dialog box.
In the field below the All button the
list: 1to5 will appear
Close

In the Calculations – LRFD:2000 The option allows determining parameters of calculations


dialog box switch on the Optimization performed for member groups taking the optimization
option options into account.

LMC the Options button Opens the Optimizations Options dialog box.

In the Optimization Options dialog Activation of this option will result in searching for the
box switch on the Weight option lightest section in the group of sections that meet the code-
defined criteria.

OK Closes the Optimization Options dialog box.

LMC the Load Case Selection Opens the Load Case Selection dialog box.
button in the Calculations dialog box

LMC the All button (in the field above Selects all load cases.
the Previous button), the list: 1to8
13to16 will appear there, Close

Activate the Ultimate option in the


Limit State field

LMC the Calculations button Starts design of the selected member groups; the Short
Results dialog box appears on the screen (see the drawing
below).

118 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

LMC the Change All button in the Changes the currently used sections of the members
LRFD:2000 - Code Group Design belonging to all member groups to the calculated sections:
dialog box shown above - for Upper Chords from S 15x50 to S 18x54.7,
- for Lower Chords from S 15x50 to S 6x12.5,
- for Diagonals from S 15x50 to S 18x54.7,
- for Bracings from DL 2x2x0.25 to DL 4x4x0.25
- for Beams from MC 12x50 to MC 8x21.4

Close Closes the Code Group Design dialog box.

Recalculates the structure with the changed member


sections

LMC the Calculations button in the Starts design of the selected member groups; the Short
Calculations dialog box Results dialog box appears on the screen (see the drawing
below).

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 119


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

LMC the Change All button in the Changes the currently used sections of the members
LRFD:2000 - Code Group Design belonging to all member groups to the calculated sections:
dialog box shown above - for Upper Chords - without changes,
- for Lower Chords from S 6x12.5 to S 4x7.7,
- for Diagonals - without changes,
- for Bracings from DL 4x4x0.25 to DL 4x4x0.312,
- for Beams from MC 8x21.4 to MC 6x15.1

Close Closes the Code Group Design dialog box.

Recalculates the structure with the changed member


sections

LMC the Calculations button in the Starts design of the selected member groups; the Short
Calculations dialog box Results dialog box appears on the screen (see the drawing
below).

120 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Close Closes the Code Group Design dialog box.

Close the Member Verification and


the Results dialog boxes

Member Verification

In the Calculations - LRFD:2000 Activates the code group verification option.


dialog box switch on the Code Group
Verification option

LMC in the List button in the Code Opens the Code Group Selection dialog box.
Group Verification option

Press the All button located in the Selects member groups to be designed, closes the Code
upper part of the Code Group Group Selection dialog box.
Selection dialog box.
In the field below the All button the
list: 1to5 will appear, Close

LMC the Load Case Selection Opens the Load Case Selection dialog box.
button in the Calculations dialog box

LMC the All button (in the field above Selects all load cases.
the Previous button), the list: 1to8
13to16 will appear, Close

LMC the Calculations button in the Starts code group verification of selected member groups;
Calculations dialog box the Short Results dialog box appears on the screen (see
the drawing below).

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 121


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Close Closes the Code Group Verification dialog box.

8.4 Time History Analysis

LMC in the field for selection of the Selects the initial Robot Millennium layout.
Robot Millennium program layouts
Structure Model/Geometry

Analysis / Analysis Types Opens the Analysis Type dialog box which allows defining
a new load case (modal analysis, spectral analysis, seismic
analysis, etc.), changing the load case type and introducing
changes to the parameters of the selected load case.

LMC in the New button Opens the New Case Definition dialog box which allows
defining new dynamic cases within the structure.

LMC in the OK button Opens the Modal Analysis Parameters dialog box which
allows defining modal analysis parameters for the new
dynamic cases in the structure

In the Method field select the Chooses the method of structure analysis. Selects the
Lanczos option, in the Parameters mode number (3), takes account of damping during
field switch on the Include Damping calculations.
in Calculations option (PS 92), in the
Number of Modes field
{3}

OK Closes the Modal Analysis Parameters dialog box and


adds a new load case to the list of available load cases.

LMC in the New button Opens the New Case Definition dialog box which allows
defining new dynamic cases within the structure.

Select the Time History Analysis Opens the Time History Analysis dialog box which is used
option, OK to define time history analysis parameters for a new
dynamic load case defined for the structure

LMC in the Function definition Opens the Time Function Definition dialog box.
button

122 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

In the Defined function field enter the Assigns the name to the time function. The new tabs: Points
function name: Wind impact, Add and Add functions will appear in the dialog box.

On the Points tab define consecutive Defines the time function, closes the Time Function
points of the time function: Definition dialog box.
T = 0.00, F(T) = 0.00 Add
T = 0.01, F(T) = 5.00 Add
T = 0.02, F(T) = 0.00 Add
T = 1.00, F(T) = 0.00 Add
Close

In the Time History Analysis field Selects the number of a selected case.
select 5th load case: WIND1 from
the available load case list

LMC in the buttons Add, OK Assigns a static load case which will be used during time
analysis, closes the Time History Analysis dialog box.

Tools / Job Preferences / Structure Opens the Job Preferences dialog box
Analysis

Select the DSC Algorithm option, Assumes the DSC algorithm for calculations, closes the
OK Job Preferences dialog box

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 123


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

LMC in the Calculations button Starts calculation of the structure for the defined load
cases. Once the calculations are completed, the viewer
title bar will show the following information: Finite
Elements Results - available.

Close Closes the Analysis Types dialog box.

Select from the upper menu: Opens the Time History Analysis dialog box
Results / Advanced / Time History
Analysis - Diagrams

Add Opens the Diagram Definition dialog box which is used


to define a diagram of the quantities calculated during the
time history analysis.

Select the following option on the Selects displacement in the UX direction


Nodes tab:
Displacement, UX

In the Point field enter the node Selects node no. 12 (see the figure below) for which the
number: diagram will be presented
{12}

Add, Close In the panel located on the left side of the screen (Available
diagrams), the defined displacement with the default name:
Displacement_UX_12 appears; closing of the Diagram
Definition dialog box.

LMC in the Displacement_UX_12 (it Moves the selected diagram to the panel on the right side of
will be highlighted) and press the the screen (Presented diagrams).
button

Switch on the Open a new window Displays the displacement (Displacement_UX_12) diagram
option and press the Apply button on the screen (see the figure below).

124 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Select Displacement_UX_12 from Deletes the selected quantity from the panel on the right
the panel on the right-hand side of side of the screen
the screen and then, press the
button

Add Opens the Diagram Definition dialog box which is used to


define diagrams of the quantities calculated during time
history analysis.

Select the following option on the Selects acceleration in the UX direction.


Node tab:
Acceleration,
UX

In the Point field enter the node Selects the node no. 12 (see the picture below) for which
number: the diagram will be prepared
{12}

Add, Close In the panel on the left side of the screen (Available
diagrams) the defined displacement with default name:
Acceleration_AX_12 appears, closing of the Diagram
Definition dialog box.

LMC in the Acceleration_AX_12 (it Moves the selected diagram to the panel on the right side of
will be highlighted) and the press the the screen (Presented diagrams).
button

Switch on the Open a new window Displays the acceleration (Acceleration_AX_12) diagram on
option and press the Apply button the screen (see the figure below).

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 125


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

126 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

9. Volumetric Structure
This example presents definition, analysis and design of a machine foundation shown in the figure
below.
Data units: (ft) and (kip).

Four load cases have been assigned to the structure and three of them are displayed in the drawings
below.

LOAD CASE 2 - LL1

LOAD CASE 3 - LL2

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 127


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

LOAD CASE 4 - LL3

The following rules apply during structure definition:


• any icon symbol means that the relevant icon is pressed with the left mouse button,
• ( x ) stands for selection of the ‘x’ option in the dialog box or entering the ‘x’ value,
• LMC and RMC - abbreviations for the Left Mouse button Click and the Right Mouse button Click.

To run structure definition start the Robot Millennium program (press the appropriate icon or select
the command from the taskbar). The vignette window will be displayed on the screen and the icon

(Volumetric Structure Design), the last but one in the first row, should be selected.

9.1 Definition of Structure Model

Definition of Structural Axes

PERFORMED OPERATION DESCRIPTION

Geometry / Axis Definition Opens the Structural Axis dialog box which allows defining
structural axes.

On the X tab chose the Define option Defines the method of axis numbering. Creates the vertical
located in the Numbering field and axes designated with consecutive numbers x1, x2, x3, etc.
then enter the x1 number in the edit
field.
Enter the following values in the
Position field:
(0) Insert,
(3) Insert,
(5) Insert,
(17) Insert,
(19) Insert,
(31) Insert,
(33) Insert,
(36) Insert

128 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

On the Y tab chose the Define option Defines the method of axis numbering. Creates the vertical
located in the Numbering field and axes designated with consecutive numbers y1, y2, y3 etc.
then enter the y1 number in the edit
field.
Enter the following values in the
Position field:
(0) Insert,
(2) Insert,
(4) Insert,
(14) Insert,
(16) Insert,
(18) Insert

On the Z tab chose the Define option Defines the method of axis numbering. Creates the vertical
located in the Numbering field and axes designated with consecutive numbers z1, z2, z3 etc.
then enter the z1 number in the edit
field.
Enter the following values in the
Position field:
(0) Insert,
(2) Insert,
(12) Insert,
(14) Insert

Apply, Close Displays the recently defined structural axis on the screen,
closes the Structural Axis dialog box.

View / Projection / 3D xyz Displays a 3D view of the structure.

Presents the initial view of the structure axes (see the


picture below).

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 129


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Definition of the Structure

A Base of the Foundation

View / Projection / Xy Once this option is selected, the structure is set on the XY
plane.

Select from the menu Geometry / Opens the Polyline - Contour dialog box that allows
Objects / Polyline - contour defining various line types.

LMC in the Geometry button Opens the dialog box that allows defining a contour.

Set the cursor in the green field, then Defines a contour, closes the Polyline - Contour dialog
switch to the graphic viewer and box.
select graphically the consecutive
points defining the contour (i.e. the
intersection points of the appropriate
structural axes):
x1 - y1,
x8 - y1,
x8 - y6,
x1 - y6
Apply, Close

Presents the initial view of the structure.

Geometry / Panels Opens the Panel dialog box that allows defining structure
panels.

Activate the Face option in the Once this option is selected, the currently generated object
Contour Type field will be defined as a face (without assigning properties),
which enable using such an object during generation of
a volumetric structure.

LMC in the Internal Point field and Applies current properties to the selected panel.
select the point inside the contour by
left-clicking on it

Close Closes the Panel dialog box.

View / Projection / 3D xyz Once this option is selected, a 3D view of the structure is
displayed. The defined structure (without presentation of the
structural axes) is shown in the drawing below.

130 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Selects the recently defined panel, whose color changes to


red.
In the selection field enter number 1,
Enter

Geometry / Objects / Extrude Opens the Extrude dialog box which is used to create
simple solid-like elements by extruding predefined two-
dimensional objects.

Activate the ll to Axis option and Once this option is selected, the object will be extruded
select the Z axis along the axis that is parallel to the Z axis of the global
coordinate system.

In the edit field set the length of the Defines the length of the extrusion vector.
extrusion vector as 2

Enter 1 in the Division Number field Defines the number of divisions to be performed while
extruding the selected object.

Apply, Close Extrudes the selected two-dimensional object along the


appropriate axis.

Columns

View / Work in 3D / Global Work Opens the Work Plane dialog box that allows setting the
Plane work plane for structure definition/modification.

Switch to the graphic viewer and Sets a new global work plane for structure definition.
select graphically the intersection The coordinates in the Work Plane dialog box will change
point of the following axes: automatically to the selected ones e.g. (0.0, 0.0, 2.0).
x1 - y1 - z2 and then press the Apply
button

Close the Work Plane dialog box by Closes the Work Plane dialog box.
means of the button

View / Projection / Xy Once this option is selected, the structure is set on the XY
plane for the Z coordinate value recently defined (i.e. Z =
2.0). Only the structure components located in this plane will
remain visible.

Geometry / Objects / Cube Opens the Cube dialog box that allows defining cubes.

Select the three points option in the Selects a rectangle as a base of the cube. The rectangle will
Definition Method field be defined by means of the two opposite apexes of the
rectangle.

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 131


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Switch to the graphic editor and Defines the cube, closes the Cube dialog box.
select two opposite apexes of the
rectangle defined by means of the
intersection points of the following
axes:
x2 - y2,
x3 - y2,
x3 - y3,
then in the Height field located in the
Geometry dialog box enter the value
10 and press the Apply and Close
buttons

Switch to the graphic viewer and Selects the recently defined cube.
enter the number 2 in the selection
field next to the , Enter

Edit / Edit / Translate Opens the Translation dialog box.

In the graphic viewer select the top- Translates the selected cube.
right apex of the rectangle, which
defines base of the cube. In the
Translation Vector field located in the
Translation dialog box, enter the
following numbers:
(0.0, 12.0, 0.0), Execute

RMC in the graphic viewer and Opens the context menu


choose the Select option

Select the recently defined cubes Translate the selected cubes.


(nos. 2 and 3 appear in the edit field).
Switch to the Translation dialog box
and in the Number of Repetitions
field enter 2, then define the
translation vector:
(14.0, 0.0, 0.0), Execute, Close

View / Projection / 3D xyz Once this option is selected, a 3D view of the structure is
displayed. The defined structure (without presentation of the
construction axis) is shown in the drawing below.

132 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Top of the Foundation

View / Display Opens the Display dialog box with the options enabling
display of selected structure attributes on the screen.
On the Finite elements tab switch off Switches off display of the panel description and closes the
the option Numbers and panel Display dialog box
description,
OK

View / Work in 3D / Global Work Opens the Work Plane dialog box that allows setting the
Plane work plane for structure definition/modyfication.

Switch to the graphic viewer and Sets a new global work plane for structure definition.
select graphically the intersection The coordinates in the Work Plane dialog box will change
point of the following axes: automatically to the selected ones e.g. (3.00, 2.00, 14.00).
x2 - y2 - z4 and then press the Apply
button

Close the Work Plane dialog box by Closes the Work Plane dialog box.
means of the button

View / Projection / Xy Once this option is selected, the structure is set on the XY
plane for the Z coordinate value recently defined
(i.e. z = 14.0). Only the structure components located in this
plane will remain visible.

Geometry / Objects / Polyline - Opens the Polyline - Contour dialog box which allows
contour defining various line types.

Set the cursor in the green field, then Defines contour, closes the Polyline - Contour dialog box.
switch to the graphic viewer and
select graphically the consecutive
points defining the contour (i.e. the
intersection points of the appropriate
structural axes):
x2 - y2,
x7 - y2,
x7 - y5,
x2 - y5,
Apply, Close

Geometry / Panels Opens the Panel dialog box that enables definition of
panels in a structure

Switch on the Face option located in If this option is selected, the created object will be defined
the Contour type field as a wall (without assigning such properties as
a reinforcement type or thickness) which makes it possible
to use this object while generating a volumetric structure

LMC on the Internal point option Assigns the selected properties to the chosen panel
located in the Creation with field,
select any point within the contour

Close Closes the Panel dialog box

Selects the recently defined contour whose color changes to


In the selection field, next to the red.
icon, enter 8,
Enter

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 133


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Geometry / Objects / Extrude Opens the Extrude dialog box which is used to create
simple solid-like elements by extruding predefined two-
dimensional objects.

Activate the ll to Axis option and Once this option is selected, the object will be extruded
select the Z axis along the axis that is parallel to the Z axis of the global
coordinate system.

In the edit field set the length of the Defines the length of the extrusion vector.
extrusion vector as – 2

Enter 1 in the Division Number field Defines the number of divisions to be performed during the
extrusion process.
Apply, Close Extrudes the selected two-dimensional object along the
appropriate axis.

If this option is selected, invisible lines in the structure will


not be displayed

View / Projection / 3D xyz Once this option is selected, a 3D view of the structure is
displayed.

If this option is selected, invisible lines in the structure will


not be displayed

Presents the initial view of the structure (see the picture


below).

Support Definition

LMC on the field for selection of the Selects the Robot Millennium layout that allows defining
Robot Millennium program layouts supports.
Structure Model/Supports

In the Supports dialog box press the Opens the Support Definition dialog box that allows
defining a new support.
icon

134 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

On the Elastic tab switch off the UZ Defines the support elasticity coefficient for the
option and in the KZ field that displacement in the Z direction.
becames available enter 4800 (kip/ft)

In the Label field enter the name for Assigns the name to the defined support
a new support: Elastic Foundation
Add, Close

In the Supports dialog box, LMC on Selects a structure surface for which supports will be
the Current Selection field on the defined.
Planar tab

Switch to the graphic viewer; Selects the surface of the foundation base.
pressing the left mouse button select
the surface being the base of the
foundation - in the Current Selection
field 1_REF(1) will appear

From the Supports dialog box select Selects the support type.
the recently defined Elastic
foundation support (the icon will be
highlighted)

LMC on the Apply button The selected support type will be assigned to the chosen
structure surface.

LMC on the field for selection of the Selects the initial Robot Millennium layout.
Robot Millennium program layouts
Structure Model/Geometry

View / Display Opens the Display dialog box that allows selecting structure
attributes for presentation.

On the Structure tab, in the Display Displays symbols of structure supports on the screen,
dialog box activate Supports - closes the Display dialog box.
symbols, Apply, OK The defined structure is shown in the drawing below.

Using the dynamic zoom option enables structure rotation


and pan, so that the bottom structure part with supports can
be presented.

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 135


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Mesh Generation

In order to improve mesh generation define additional nodes.


View / Grid / Grid Step Definition Opens the Grid Step Definition dialog box, which is
used to change the grid step presented on the screen.

In the Grid Step field set the grid Changes the grid step, closes the Grid Step Definition
step Dx and Dy as 1.00, Apply, dialog box
Close

View / Work in 3D / Global Work Opens the Work Plane dialog box that allows setting the
Plane work plane for structure definition/modification.

Switch to the graphic viewer and Sets a new global work plane for structure definition.
select graphically the intersection The coordinates in the Work Plane dialog box will
point of the following axes: change automatically to the selected ones e.g. (0.0, 0.0,
x1 - y1 - z1 and then press the 0.0).
Apply button

Close the Work Plane dialog box Closes the Work Plane dialog box.
by means of the button

View / Projection / Xy Once this option is selected, the structure is set on the
XY plane for the Z coordinate value recently defined
(i.e. z = 0.0). Only the structure components located on
this plane will remain visible.

Geometry / Nodes Opens the Nodes dialog box that allows defining the
structure nodes.

Define the additional nodes whose Defines nodes, closes the Node dialog box.
coordinates are the intersection
points of the following structure
axes:
x2 - y2, x3 - y2, x3 - y3, x2 - y3,
and the nodes of the following
coordinates:
(4.00, 2.00, 0.00),
(5.00, 3.00, 0.00),
(4.00, 4.00, 0.00),
(3.00, 3.00, 0.00),

In the edit field located next to the Selects all the nodes defined in the structure.
icon enter all, Enter

Edit / Edit / Translate Opens the Translation dialog box.

In the Translation vector field enter:


(14.00, 0.00, 0.00)
In the Number of repetitions field
enter: 2
Execute, Close

In the edit field located next to the Selects all the nodes defined in the structure.
icon enter all, Enter

136 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Edit / Edit / Horizontal mirror Opens the Horizontal Mirror dialog box

LMC on the Axis Position field Defines the position of the horizontal symmetry axis.
9.00

Execute, Close Performs horizontal symmetry of the selected nodes,


closes the Horizontal Mirror dialog box.

View / Projection / 3D xyz Once this option is selected, a 3D view of the structure is
displayed.

View / Work in 3D / Global Work Opens the Work Plane dialog box that allows setting the
Plane work plane for structure definition/modification.

In the graphic viewer select Sets a new global work plane for structure definition.
graphically the intersection point of The coordinates in the Work Plane dialog box will
the following axes: change automatically to the selected ones e.g. (3.0, 3.0,
x2 - y2 - z4 and then press the 14.0).
Apply button

Close the Work Plane dialog box Closes the Work Plane dialog box.
by means of the button

View / Projection / Xy Once this option is selected, the structure is set on the
XY plane for the Z coordinate value recently defined
(i.e. z = 14.0). Only the structure components located on
this plane will remain visible.

Geometry / Nodes Opens the Nodes dialog box which allows defining the
structure nodes.

Define additional nodes whose Defines nodes, closes the Nodes dialog box.
coordinates are the intersection
points of the following structure
axes:
x2 - y3, x3 - y2, x3 - y3, x2 - y2,
and the nodes of the following
coordinates:
(4.00, 2.00, 14.00),
(5.00, 3.00, 14.00),
(4.00, 4.00, 14.00),
(3.00, 3.00, 14.00),

In the edit field located next to the Selects nodes defined in the current work plane.
icon enter: 49to56,
Enter

Edit / Edit / Translate Opens the Translation dialog box.

In the Translation vector field enter:


(14.00, 0.00, 0.00)
In the Number of repetitions field: 2
Execute, Close

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 137


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

In the edit field located next to the Selects nodes defined in the current work plane.
icon enter numbers of the
recently defined nodes: 49to72,
Enter

Edit / Edit / Horizontal mirror Opens the Horizontal Mirror dialog box.

In the Axis Location edit field enter Defines the coordinate of the horizontal mirror axis.
9.00

Execute, Close Mirrors horizontally the selected nodes, closes the


Horizontal Mirror dialog box.

Geometry / Nodes Opens the Nodes dialog box which allows defining
structure nodes.

In the Coordinates field enter the Defines the additional node no. 97 to which a nodal force
coordinates of the additional node: will be applied, closes the Nodes dialog box.
(25.0, 9.0, 14.0),
Add, Close

Selects the base and top of the foundation.


In the edit field next to the
icon enter: 1 and 8 (1 8), Enter

Analysis / Calculation Model / Opens the Meshing Options dialog box.


Meshing Options

In the Available Meshing Methods Sets the meshing parameters for the selected structure
field select the Delaunay option, in components.
the Mesh Generation field select
the Automatic option and enter 5 in
the Division 1 field, OK

Selects all columns of the foundation.


In the edit field next to the
icon enter: 2to7, Enter

Analysis / Calculation Model / Opens the Meshing Options dialog box.


Meshing Options

In the Available Meshing Methods Sets the meshing parameters for selected structure
field select the Delaunay option, in components.
the Mesh Generation field select
the Automatic option and enter 2 in
the Division 1 field, OK

Analysis / Calculation Model / If this option is selected, the program starts to generate
Generation the calculation model of the structure (finite elements),
see the picture below.

View / Projection / 3D xyz Once this option is selected, a 3D view of the structure is
displayed. The defined structure is shown in the drawing
below.

138 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Geometry / Properties / Solid Opens the Solid Properties dialog box.


Properties

LMC on the Selection field Enter all (all structure elements)

LMC on the material Concrete Selects material. If the material is not available on the
available material list, the user should press the icon
Definition of new solid properties and add concrete to the list
of materials

Apply, Close Assigns the material to all the structure elements and closes
the dialog box

Load Definition

View / Projection / Xy Once this option is selected, the structure is set on the XY
plane for the Z coordinate recently defined (i.e. z = 14.0).
Only the structure components located on this plane will
remain visible.

LMC in the Robot Millennium layout Selects the Robot Millennium program layout that allows
selection field defining structure loads.
Structure Model/Loads

LMC in the New button in the Load Defines a dead load with a standard name DL1.
Types dialog box

LMC in the Nature field, Selects the type of a load case: live.
(live)

LMC on the New button Defines two cases of live load with the standard names:
LMC on the New button LL1, LL2 and LL3.
LMC on the New button

Note: The self-weight load was automatically applied to all


structure elements (in the “Z” direction).

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 139


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Opens the Load Definition dialog box.


LMC on the icon located in the
right toolbar

In the Load Definition dialog box Opens the Uniform Planar Load dialog box
select the Surface tab and press the

icon

Selects the load case: Live Load 1 (2:LL1).

In the Values Z: field enter - 0.5 Defines the value of the uniform load acting on surface FEs
in the direction of the Z axis of the global coordinate system.

Add Closes the Uniform Planar Load dialog box.

Set the cursor in the Apply To field, Displays the currently selected structure panel.
switch to the graphic viewer and
select the contour 8 defining the top
surface of the foundation - 8_REF(1)
will appear in the edit field

Apply Applies the predefined load to the chosen panel contour.

In the Load Definition dialog box Opens the Uniform Planar Load (contour) dialog box.
select Surface tab and press the

icon

Selects the load case: Live Load 2 (3:LL2).

In the Values Z: field enter -0.9 Defines the value of the uniform load acting on surface FEs
in the direction of the Z axis of the global coordinate system.

LMC on the Contour Definition Opens the dialog box that allows defining the contour to
button which the load will be applied. It may be performed either in
the dialog box or graphically on the screen.

In the green field enter the points Defines the contour to which the loads will be applied.
defining the contour by clicking on
the appropriate points of structure
axes intersections:
x2 - y3,
x4 - y3,
x4 - y5,
x2 - y5

140 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

LMC on the Add button located in Closes the Uniform Planar Load (contour) dialog box.
the lower part of the dialog box
Uniform Planar Load (contour)

Set the cursor in the Apply To field, Displays the currently selected structure panel.
switch to the graphic viewer and
select the contour 8 defining the top
surface of the foundation - 8_REF(1)
will appear in the edit field

Apply Applies the predefined load to the chosen contour on the


panel.

In the Load Definition dialog box Opens the Nodal Force dialog box.
select the Node tab and press the

(Nodal force) icon

Selects the load case: Live Load 3.

In the Values Z: field enter -0.5, Defines the concentrated force loads acting on a selected
Add structure node.

In the field Apply To enter 97 Displays the currently selected structure panel (see the
picture below).
.

Apply, Close Applies the defined load to the chosen node, closes the
Nodal Force dialog box.

9.2 Structure Analysis

Starts the calculation of the defined structure. Once the


calculations are completed, the viewer title bar will show the
following information: Finite Elements Results - available.

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 141


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

9.3 Presentation of Results in the Form of Maps

LMC on the box for selection of the The RESULTS layout of the Robot Millennium program
Robot Millennium program layouts will open. The screen will be divided into two parts: a
Results/Results - maps graphical viewer containing the structure model and the
Maps dialog box.

Select the load case: 4 (LL3).

On the Detailed tab, in the Values in Selects the visualization of the displacement for individual
the local system field, activate the FEs in the local coordinate system.
third option in the Displacement line

Activate Maps option Allows presentation of results obtained for FEs in the form
of maps.

LMC the Apply button Presents the structure displacement (see the picture below).

Switch off the Displacement - z If this option is selected, the program will present
option. On the Deformation tab select deformation of the currently designed structure - see the
the active option located in the picture below.
Deformations field, Apply

Select the load case: 3 (LL2).

In the Deformations field switch on Activates presentation of deformation for the currently
the Active option designed structure.

Apply Presents the structure displacement.

142 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 143


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

10. Bar Structure Design (Elasto-Plastic Analysis)


This example presents definition, analysis and design of a simple 2D steel frame shown in the figure
below. The definition process involves application of the truss generated by means of the library of
typical structures available in the Robot Millennium program. The model considers the EC3 code
requirements with respect to geometrical imperfections and elasto-plastic material analysis.
Data units: (m) and (kN).

The following rules apply during structure definition:


• any icon symbol means that the relevant icon is pressed with the left mouse button,

• { x } stands for selection of the ‘x’ option in the dialog box,

• LMC and RMC - abbreviations for the Left Mouse button Click and the Right Mouse button Click.
To run structure definition start the Robot Millennium program (press the appropriate icon or select
the command from the taskbar). In the vignette that will be displayed on the screen (it is described in

chapter 2.1 of the manual) the first icon (Frame 2D Design) should be selected.

144 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

10.1 Definition of the Structure Model

10.1.1 Code Selection

PERFORMED OPERATION DESCRIPTION

Tools / Job Preferences Opens the Job Preferences dialog box

Materials Selects the Materials option from the tree in the dialog box

Selection from the Materials Selects the Eurocode material database


unfolding list: Eurocode

Modification Opens the Material Definition dialog box

In the Name field - enter Definition of the material of this name will be required to
STEEL read in a library structure

Add, OK Adds material named STEEL to the database

Codes Selects the Codes option from the tree in the dialog box

Steel / Aluminum structures: Selects EuroCode 3 for steel structure design


EC3 (1992)

Actions Selects the Codes - Actions option from the tree in the
dialog box

Code Combinations: Selects EuroCode for automatic code combinations


EUROCODE
Accept warnings of the code
changes

OK Accepts adopted parameters and closes the Job


Accept warnings of the code preferences dialog box
changes Accept warnings of the code changes.

10.1.2 Definition of Structural Axis

Geometry / Axis definition Starts definition of structural axes. The Structural Axis
dialog box is displayed on the screen

On the X tab: Defines parameters of the vertical structural axes


Position: {0}
Number of Repetitions: {2}
Distance: {6}
Numbering: 1, 2, 3 ...

LMC the Insert button Vertical axes have been defined and are entered to the
Defined axes field

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 145


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

LMC the Z tab Starts defining parameters of the horizontal structural axes

On the Z tab: Defines parameters of the horizontal structural axes


Position: {0.0}
Numbering: A, B, C ...

LMC the Insert button First horizontal axis has been defined and entered to the
Defined axes field

Position: {3.6}, Insert

Position: {6.0}, Insert

Position: {7.2}, Insert The remaining axes have been defined and entered to the
Defined axes field

Apply, Close Generates defined structural axes and closes the


Structural Axis dialog box. The structural axes presented
in the figure below are displayed on the screen.

10.1.3 Definition of Structure Bars

Geometry / Properties / Sections Opens the Sections dialog box

Opens the New Section dialog box

146 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Select the I-section family, Defines the following sections: IPE 240, HEA 240 and HEA
in the Section field select section 300
IPE 240, Add
HEA 300, Add
HEA 240, Add

Close (New Section dialog box) Closes the Sections and New Section dialog boxes
Close (Sections dialog box)

Opens the Bars dialog box

LMC the Bar type field and select Selects properties of a bar to be designed. The Section field
type: Column should show the recently-defined section HEA 240

LMC the Beginning field (the field Starts defining bars in the structure (structure columns)
background changes to green)

Indicate graphically or type the points Defines columns positioned on the structural lines marked
of the beginning and end of bars with numbers 1 and 3 (in the A-C range)
(0,0) (0,6) and (12,0) (12,6)

LMC the Section field and select Selects HEA 300 as the current section
section HEA 300

LMC the Beginning field (the field Starts defining bars in the structure (middle column)
background changes to green)

Indicate graphically or type the points Defines a column positioned on the structural line marked
of bar beginning and end with number 2 (in the A-B range)
(6,0) (6,3.6)

LMC the Bar type field and select the Selects properties of a bar to be designed.
type: Beam

LMC the Section field and select Selects IPE 240 as the current section
section IPE 240

LMC the Beginning field (the field Starts defining bars in the structure (a beam between the
background changes to green) columns)

Indicate graphically or type the points Defines a beam positioned on the structural line marked
of bar beginning and end with letter B (in the 2-3 range)
(6.0,3.6) (12.0,3.6)

Close Closes the Bars dialog box

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 147


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

10.1.4 Definition of a Library Structure

View / Display Opens the Display dialog box

Structure tab, switch on the Node


numbers option
Others tab, switch off the Structural
axis option
Apply, OK

Opens the Typical Structures dialog box and starts


defining a library structure

Selects the triangular truss of the 1 type. The Merge


Structure dialog box is displayed on the screen in which
LMC (twice) the icon truss parameters may be defined.
(first icon in the last row)

On the Dimensions tab Defines truss length (it may also be defined graphically in
LMC the Length L field the graphical viewer)
{12}

LMC the Height H field Defines truss height (it may also be defined graphically in
{1.2} the graphical viewer)

LMC the option:


Moments Released: No

LMC the Insert tab

LMC the Insertion point field Defines the beginning node of the truss
Indicate graphically node no. 2 of the
coordinates (0, 0, 6)

Apply Considers the data entered, data modification is possible

148 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

OK Generates the defined truss and closes the Merge


Structure dialog box. The structure defined is shown in the
figure below.

10.1.5 Addition of an Auxiliary Node

Edit / Divide Opens the Division dialog box

The Division field LMC Selects the manner of defining the insertion of the division
• in distance node - through a coordinate on the bar length

In the Distance from the top field Determines the point where the auxiliary node is to be
enter the value 3.6 (m) inserted

Move to the graphical viewer and Indicates the bar to be divided. Note: if the division through
indicate (LMC) the left column at its the coordinate on the bar length is defined, take note that
base (bar no.1) the coordinate is calculated from the indicated bar
beginning.

Close Closes the Division dialog box

10.1.6 Definition of Brackets on Bars

Geometry / Additional Attributes / Opens the Brackets dialog box


Brackets

LMC the field with the list of defined Selects the bracket type (it will be highlighted)
attributes, select the default one
Bracket_ 0.1x1

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 149


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Move to the graphical viewer; Defines brackets on the beam beginning and beam end
indicate beginning and end of the
beam (no. 4)

Close Closes the Brackets dialog box

10.1.7 Definition of Supports

Opens the Supports dialog box

In the Supports dialog box select Select the fixed support type (it will be highlighted)
Fixed support

Move to the graphical viewer; Assigns the support at node no. 1.


indicate node no.1 (the bottom node
of the extreme column)

In the Supports dialog box select Select the pinned support type (it will be highlighted)
Pinned support

Move to the graphical viewer; Assigns the supports at nodes nos. 3 and 5.
indicate nodes nos. 3 and 5 (bottom
nodes of the remaining columns)

Close Closes the Supports dialog box

10.1.8 Definition of Geometrical Imperfections

Geometry / Additional Attributes / Opens the Geometrical Imperfections dialog box


Geometrical Imperfections

Opens the Imperfection definition dialog box

In the Label field enter Defines parameters of a new imperfection type with the
During_Assembly deflection value equal to 5 cm.
switch off the Automatic option
switch on the User-defined option
enter the value 5 (cm)

Add, Close Defines the imperfection and closes the Imperfection


definition dialog box

LMC in the field with the list of Selects the imperfection type (it will be highlighted)
defined attributes, select the default
imperfection type (Automatic)

Move to the graphical viewer; Defines the imperfection (automatic imperfection according
indicate bar no. 1 (left column) to EC3) for the column

150 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

LMC the field with the list of defined Selects the imperfection type (it will be highlighted)
attributes, select the defined
imperfection type During_Assembly

Move to the graphical viewer; select Defines imperfection (defined by the user) for the bottom
the bottom truss chord (bar no. 5) truss chord

Close Closes the Geometrical Imperfections dialog box

10.1.9 Definition of Load Cases

in the bottom status bar Restores a default set of attribute display

Loads / Load Types Opens the Load Types dialog box

LMC the New button Defines the load case with the nature: dead and standard
name DL1

LMC the Nature field: Live (Live 1) Selects the load case nature: live

LMC the New button Defines the load case with the nature: live and standard
name LL1

LMC the Close button Closes the Load Types dialog box

10.1.10 Definition of Loads for the Generated Load Cases

Selects case no. 1 - self-weight load DL1.


select 1: DL1

Loads / Load Definition Opens the Load Definition dialog box.

Select the Bar tab Selects Uniform load.

Values: Defines the value of the uniform load on the bar


pZ: {-3} (kN/m),
Add

LMC the Apply to field - enter the Defines the uniform load on the indicated bars - it models
bars of the external envelope: the weight of wall and roof cladding.
1267

Apply Defines a load applied to the list of bars

Selects the live load case LL1.


select 2: LL1

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 151


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Select the Node tab Selects the Nodal Force load

Load parameters, Defines values of the nodal load.


X: {10} (kN)
Z: {-100} (kN)

LMC the Add button provided in the


bottom part of the dialog box

Move to the graphical viewer Defines the nodal load which models the overhead traveling
presenting the structure view and crane load.
indicate (LMC) nodes no. 6 and 18

Close Closes the Load Definition dialog box.

10.1.11 Snow/Wind Load Generation

Loads / Special loads / Wind and Opens the Snow and Wind 2D/3D dialog box
Snow 2D/3D

Press the Auto button Automatically generates the external structure envelope for
the Total depth field: 30, generation of snow/wind loads
the Bay spacing field: 6 (m)

Press the Parameters button Opens the additional dialog box (Snow/Wind Loads 2D/3D)
in which detailed parameters may be defined. The default
parameters will be adopted.

Generate, OK Pressing this button starts generation of snow/wind loads for


the adopted parameters. On the screen calculation notes
will be displayed presenting parameters of snow and wind
load cases.

Close the text editor with the New load cases have been generated (wind and snow
calculation notes loads).

Close Closes the Snow and Wind 2D/3D dialog box

10.1.12 Generation of Automatic Code Combinations

Loads / Code Combinations Opens the Load Case Code Combinations dialog box
according to EUROCODE.

LMC the Cases tab The dialog box contains the list of loads participating in the
automatic combinations and information to which natures
and groups they are assigned.

152 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

LMC the Relations tab The dialog box contains the relations between cases and
In the Nature field select the groups which determine the manner of combining the
following case types: dead, live, cases.
wind, snow

In the bottom part of the dialog box Reduces the number of generated combinations by
switch on the Simplified excluding those less dangerous.
combinations option

Close Closes the code combination dialog box and saves the
defined relations.

10.2 Structure Analysis and Result Verification

Analysis / Calculations Runs calculations.

Results / Stresses Opens the bar stress table.

LMC the Global extremes tab Calculates maximal stresses in bars.

Closes the table.


LMC in the top right table corner

File / Save Opens the dialog box for saving.

In the File name field enter the The default saving format: RTD.
selected name of the example, e.g.
Frame_EC3

LMC the Save button Saves the example.

10.3 Elasto-Plastic Analysis

In addition, the analysis of accidental hitting the workshop column by the overhead traveling crane will
be performed. In this case, the analysis in the plastic range will be considered.

10.3.1 Change of Load Case Definitions

Loads / Load Types Opens the Load Types dialog box

LMC the Delete all button Deletes all load cases

LMC the New button Defines the load case with the default nature and the
standard name DL1

Close Closes the Load Types dialog box

Loads / Load Definition Opens the Load Definition dialog box.

Selects the Nodal Force load.

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 153


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Load parameters, Defines values of the nodal load.


X: {120} (kN)
Z: {0}

LMC the Add button provided in the


bottom part of the dialog box

Move to the graphical viewer with the Defines the nodal load - it models the accidental load
structure view and indicate (LMC) resulting from the overhead traveling crane.
node no. 18

Close Closes the Load Definition dialog box.

10.3.2 Structure Analysis

Analysis / Calculations Runs calculations

Locate the mouse cursor on the Opens the context menu of the structure view.
extreme column (bar 1) so that it
becomes highlighted,
RMC

Object Properties Activates the Bar properties option containing information


about bar no.1.

The Code check tab Performs the simplified design of the steel bar.
As it can be seen, it does not satisfy the conditions of code
verification.

Close Closes the Bar properties dialog box.

10.3.3 Change of Bar Sections for Elasto-Plastic Analysis

Opens the Sections dialog box

LMC on HEA 240 on the section list Selects the current section

Opens the New Section dialog box with HEA 240 section
selected
LMC the field next to the Elasto- Switches on the elasto-plastic analysis for the section
plastic analysis button selected. A new section name is defined: HEA 240EP

Add, Close Defines the section HEA 240EP, closes the New Section
dialog box.

Move to the graphical viewer with the Changes the section of the indicated bars to HEA 240EP
structure view and select (LMC) section.
external columns (bars no. 1, 2) Accept the warning of changing the result status to ’not
available’.
In the Sections dialog box LMC on Selects the current section
IPE 240 on the section list

154 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Opens the New Section dialog box with IPE 240 section
selected
LMC the field next to the Elasto- Switches on the elasto-plastic analysis for the section
plastic analysis button selected. A new section name is defined: IPE 240EP

Add, Close Defines the section IPE 240EP, closes the New Section
dialog box.

Move to the graphical viewer with the Changes the section of the indicated bar to IPE 240EP
structure view and indicate (LMC) the section.
beam (bar no. 4)

Close in the Sections dialog box Closes the Sections dialog box.

10.3.4 Structure Analysis and Result Verification

Analysis / Calculations Runs calculations.

Results / Displacements Opens the node displacement table.

LMC the Global Extremes tab Calculates maximal displacements of nodes (see the figure
below). As it can be seen, in spite of the work in the plastic
range, the structure retains stability.

File / Save as Opens the saving dialog box.

In the File name field enter a The default saving format - RTD.
selected name of the example e.g.
Frame_EC3_EP

LMC the Save button Saves the example.

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 155


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

11. Design of a Bar Structure with Added Masses


This example presents definition of a 3D steel frame shown in the figure below.
Data units: (m) and (kN).

Added masses will be defined for the structure as well. They will participate in static and dynamic
loads. The loads will include definition of body forces (inertia loads due to rectilinear acceleration
forces) and centrifugal and angular acceleration forces (inertia loads due to rotational motion forces).
The example comprises also modal and harmonic analyses.

NOTE: This example has been made in version 17.0 of the Robot Millennium program.

CASES 1 and 2 CASE 3 CASE 4

The following rules apply during structure definition:


• any icon symbol means that the relevant icon is pressed with the left mouse button,
• { x } stands for selection of the ‘x’ option in the dialog box,
• LMC and RMC - abbreviations for the Left Mouse button Click and the Right Mouse button Click.

To start structure definition, run the Robot Millennium system (press the appropriate icon or select
the command from the taskbar). In the vignette window (described in chapter 2.1 of the manual) that

will be displayed on the screen, the last but one icon (Frame 3D Design) in the first row
should be selected.

156 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

11.1 Definition of the Structure Model

PERFORMED OPERATION DESCRIPTION

Opens the Sections dialog box.

Opens the New Section dialog box.

The Parametric tab, section type: Defines a new round, tubular section with determined
dimensions.

Label: O 100x5 Defines the tubular section 100x5 (mm).


d = 10.0 (cm)
t = 0.5
Add

Label: O 75x3 Defines the tubular section 75x3 (mm).


d = 7.5 (cm)
t = 0.3
Add, Close

Close Closes the Sections dialog box.

Opens the Bars dialog box.

LMC on the BAR TYPE field and Selects bar properties.


select type: Simple bar
LMC on the SECTION field and
select type: O 100x5

Drag Switches on the Drag option which enables definition of


successive bars in such a way that an end of the previous
bar is a beginning of the next bar.

LMC on the Beginning field (color of Starts definition of structure bars (structure columns).
the field background changes to
green)

Indicate the point wih coordinates: Defines a bar beginning.


(0,0,0) in the graphical viewer

Press any digit key on the keyboard Displays the Point dialog box for numeric definition of
nodes.

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 157


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Key {Backspace}, {}, {3} Defines bars that form a square.


Key {}, {3}
Key {}, {3}
Key {}, {3}, {Enter}

Close in the Point dialog box Closes the Point dialog box.

LMC on the SECTION field and Selects bar properties.


select type: O 75x3

Drag Switches off the Drag option.

LMC on the Beginning field (color of Starts definition of structure bars (structure columns).
the field background changes to
green)

In the graphical viewer indicate the Defines two bars being diagonals of the square.
points with coordinates:
(0, 0, 0) – (3, 0, 3)
(0, 0, 3) – (3, 0, 0)

Close Closes the Bars dialog box.

View / Projection / 3D xyz Selects structure axonometric view.

Opens the Sections dialog box.

LMC on the name: O 100x5 on the Selects the O 100x5 section as a default one and closes the
section list, Close Sections dialog box.

CTRL + A Selects all structure bars


(they may also be selected with the window).

Edit / Edit / Translate Opens the Translation dialog box.

LMC on the (dX, dY, dZ) field and Defines the translation vector.
enter the coordinates (0, 2.5, 0)

158 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

LMC on the Number of repetitions Defines how many times the copying operation is to be
field repeated.
{3}

Drag Switches on the Drag option that enables automatic


definition of bars between copied nodes. The bars defined
automatically are assigned the properties that are currently
chosen as default ones.

Execute, Close Translates the structure and closes the Translation dialog
box.

Click on the graphical viewer on the Switches off the current selection of bars and nodes.
point out of the structure

View / Projection / Xy Selects 2D view of the structure in XY plane for Z=0.0.

Opens the Supports dialog box.

In the Supports dialog box select the Selects support type.


icon which stands for pinned support
- Pinned (it will be highlighted)

LMC on the Current selection field Selects structure nodes at which structure supports will be
defined.
Switch to the graphical viewer; Enters the list of selected nodes: 1 4 13 16 to the Current
keeping the left mouse button selection field.
pressed – select with the window
nodes of the top bar and (with Ctrl
key pressed) nodes of the bottom
bar

Apply, Close Assigns the selected support type to the selected structure
nodes; closes the Supports dialog box.

LMC on the field for selection of the Selects the layout of the Robot Millennium system which
Robot Millennium system layouts facilitates definition of structure loads (there are dialog box
Structure Model / Loads and table for load definition).

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 159


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

LMC on the New button in the Load Defines the load case with the nature: self-weight and
Types dialog box standard name DL1.
In the first load case the self-weight of the whole structure is
added automatically, which can be seen in the load table.

Displays the dialog box for view selection

Selects 2D view of the structure.

Selects XY projection plane (initially, for Z=0.0).

Selects XY projection plane with the coordinate Z=3.0.

enter {3} {Enter} Closes the View dialog box.


Close

Opens the dialog box fo load definition.


Loads / Load Definition

Self-weight and mass tab Goes to the tab for definition of self-weight loads and inertia
loads.

Opens the dialog box for definition of added masses.


Added masses - nodes

Enter weight values (kG): Defines nodal masses whose weight is 100 kG for
X = 100 translational degrees of freedom.
Y = 100 The masses will participate in all the load cases (static and
Z = 100 dynamic ones).
Apply to all cases
Add

LMC on the Apply to field Selects structure nodes at which nodal masses will be
defined.

Switch to the graphical viewer; Enters the list of selected nodes: 2to14By4 3to15By4 to the
keeping the left mouse button Apply to field.
pressed select with the window - all
the nodes in the presented work
plane

Apply, Close Applies defined added masses to selected structure nodes;


closes the Load Definition dialog box.

View / Projection / 3D xyz Selects structure axonometric view.

LMC on the New button in the Load Defines a new load case with the nature: self-weight and the
Types dialog box standard name: DL2.

Opens the dialog box for load definition.


Loads / Load Definition

160 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Self-weight and mass tab Goes to the tab for definition of self-weight loads and inertia
loads.

Opens the dialog box for definition of inertia loads due to


rectilinear acceleration forces.
Body forces

relative x g Defines body forces with acceleration of gravity g for nodal


Enter a: masses, i.e. takes account of self-weight of added masses.
Z = -1
Apply to added masses
Add

Apply, Close For the load applied to added masses object selection is not
required because action of this load concerns all the
masses assigned to a given load case.
Closes the Load Definition dialog box.

In the Load Types dialog box select Defines a new load case with the nature: live, named:
the load nature: live TRANSPORT.
enter the case name: TRANSPORT
LMC on the New button This load case is aimed at modeling the action of inertia
forces on the frame and on additional masses due to
rotational motion forces caused by (ship) rolling during
transport.

Opens the dialog box for load definition.


Loads / Load Definition

Self-weight and mass tab Goes to the tab for definition of self-weight loads and inertia
loads.

Opens the dialog box for definition of inertia loads due to


rotational motion forces, i.e. angular acceleration forces
Centrifugal and angular
(tangential forces) and velocity forces (centrifugal forces).
acceleration forces
Enter coordinates of the rotation Defines inertia forces due to rotational motion about point C.
center C: (0.0, 0.0, -5.0) Rotation about X axis with velocity v= 0.5 (rad/s) and
Enter to Centrifugal velocity and acceleration a= 0.2 (rad/s2).
acceleration (Rad/..): Rotation about Y axis with velocity v= 0.2 (rad/s) and
vX = 0,5 aX = 0,2 acceleration a= 0.1 (rad/s2).
vY = 0,2 aY = 0,1
Add

LMC on the Apply to field Selects structure elements for which centrifugal and angular
acceleration forces will be defined.

Click on the graphical viewer; Selects the whole structure. Enters the list of all bars to the
{ Ctrl + A } Apply to field.

Apply Defines the load.

Opens again the dialog box for definition of inertia loads due
to rotational motion forces.
Centrifugal and angular
acceleration forces

Apply to added masses For the current load parameters - selects the option
Add enabling definition of load generated by added masses.

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 161


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Apply, Close Defines the load; for the load applied to added masses
object selection is not required because action of this load
concerns all the masses assigned to a given load case.
Closes the Load Definition dialog box.

In the Load Types dialog box, Defines the new load case with the nature: live, named:
for the load nature: live ROTOR.
enter the case name: ROTOR
LMC on the New button This load case is aimed at modeling operation of the
equipment mounted on the frame by considering its weight
and vibrating force in hamonic analysis.

Opens the dialog box for load definition.


Loads / Load Definition

Node tab Opens the dialog box for definition of loads due to nodal
forces.
Nodal force

Enter: Defines the nodal force. Afterwards, this load will be used in
FZ = -0,5 (kN) harmonic analysis as an excitation load.
Add

LMC on the Apply to field Selects structure nodes at which nodal forces will be
applied.

Switch to the graphical viewer; Enters the list of selected nodes: 6 7 10 11 to the Apply to
keeping the left mouse button field.
pressed select with the window - four
middle nodes on the top plane of the
frame

Apply Assigns defined forces to selected structure nodes.

Self-weight and mass tab Goes to the tab for definition of self-weight loads and inertia
loads.

Opens the dialog box for definition of added masses.


Added masses – nodes

162 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Enter Values of weight (kG): Defines nodal masses with weight 200 kG for the direction
X=0 of freedom Z.
Y=0 Masses are defined only for the current load case.
Z = 200
Apply to all cases
Add

LMC on the Apply to field Selects structure nodes at which added masses will be
defined.

Switch to the graphical viewer; Enters the list of selected nodes: 6 7 10 11 to the Apply to
keeping the left mouse button field.
pressed select with the window - four
middle nodes on the top plane of the
frame

Apply, Close Applies defined added masses to the selected structure


nodes;
closes the Load Definition dialog box.

Analysis / Analysis Types Opens the Analysis Type dialog box.

In the dialog box on the load case list Selects the current case.
select – with LMC – the following
case:

Change analysis type Opens the Change Analysis Type dialog box.

Harmonic analysis Changes the analysis type for case 4 to harmonic analysis.
OK Opens the Harmonic Analysis Parameters dialog box.

Frequency Defines parameters of harmonic analysis.


enter: 20 (Hz) Accepts the parameters and closes the dialog box.
OK

New Opens the New Case Definition dialog box.

Modal Selects modal analysis.


OK

OK Accepts default parameters of modal analysis and closes


the dialog box.

Close Closes the Analysis Type dialog box.

Loads / Mass Table Opens the table of added masses.

LMC on the first column for mass Changes the case to which added masses are assigned.
definition FZ=200(kG)
Masses may be assigned to a single case or to all static or
dynamic cases.

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 163


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Set the following on the list: Assigns the mass to all dynamic cases, i.e., in this example,
dynamic to cases of harmonic and modal analyses.

{Enter}

LMC on the Values tab in the table Goes to the Values tab, checks definitions of added
masses.

in the mass table Closes the Added masses table.

Loads / Combinations Opens the Combination Definition / Modification dialog


box.

OK in the dialog box for definition of Accepts combination parameters. Opens the
combination parameters Combinations dialog box.

Select case 1 from Case list, enter Defines combination cases and factors.
the factor to the Factor field Note: if ”auto” is selected in the Factor field, then
combination factors will be adopted automatically
according to the code assumed in Job Preferences.

Defines the combination of cases 1+2+3, as shown below:


LMC on for the selected case,
next, repeat the selection for cases
nos. 2 and 3,

Apply

New Defines a new combination.

OK in the dialog box for definition of Accepts combination parameters; opens the Combinations
combination parameters dialog box.

Select cases and move them to the Defines the combination of cases 1+2+4; closes the
Combinations dialog box.
field with combination definition
for cases 1, 2 and 4.
Apply, Close

11.2 Calculations and Result Analysis

Starts calculations of the defined structure.

LMC on the field for selection of Opens the RESULTS layout of the Robot Millennium
layouts of the Robot Millennium system. The monitor screen will then be split into three
system parts: graphical viewer with a structure model, Diagrams
Results / Results dialog box and table presenting reaction values.

164 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

RMC, Display Opens the dialog box for selection of structure attributes to
be displayed.

LMC on the Loads tab Goes to the tab for selection of structure attributes
concerned with loads to be displayed.

Switches on display of forces that are generated


Symbols
automatically for certain types of loads.
Forces generated
automatcally
OK

On the top selection bar Selects the current load case, the program displays nodal
forces generated automatically for added masses in the
body force load.
select 2: DL2

On the top selection bar: Selects the current load case, the program displays linear
and nodal foces generated automatically for added masses
and bars in the rotational motion load.
select 3: TRANSPORT

LMC on in the bottom toolbar Restores the default set of displayed attributes.

Select the Deformation tab in the Selects presentation of structure deformations for the
Diagrams dialog box selected load case.
Switch on the Deformation option

LMC on the Apply button Presents structure deformations (see the figure below);
similarly, diagrams of other quantities available in the
Diagrams dialog box may be presented.

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 165


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Switch off the Deformation option in


the Diagrams dialog box,
Apply

Results / Stresses Opens the Stresses result table.

On the top selection bar Selects the combination 6 and 7 as the current case in the
table.

enter 6 and 7 {Enter}

RMC in the table Opens the Bar value selection dialog box from the context
Table Columns menu in the table.

Switch off the stress options: Excludes the columns with results for stresses due to axial
axial forces and bending from the table.
Closes the dialog box with parameters.
bending
OK

LMC on the Global extremes tab in Goes to the tab where maximum and minimum values are
the table displayed for the quantities and selection set in the table.

in the stress table Closes the Stresses table.

Results / Advanced / Modal Analysis Opens the Dynamic Analysis Results table.

On the top selection bar Select the modal analysis case.

As it can be seen, the frequency of harmonic excitation (20


select case 5: Modal Hz) does not cause resonance with values of eigenvibration
frequency.

in the table with the dynamic Closes the Dynamic Analysis Results table.
analysis results

166 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

12. Definition of a PushOver Analysis Case


The example presents a definition of a PushOver analysis. The approach allows the user to estimate
the state of a structure after an earthquake based on the capacity curve (which is the result of the
analysis) and on the assigned code coefficients defining the seismic zone. A simple 3D steel frame
presented below will be defined in the example.
Data units: (ft) and (kip).

The following rules apply during structure definition:


• any icon symbol means that the relevant icon is pressed with the left mouse button,
• ( x ) stands for selection of the ‘x’ option in the dialog box or entering the ‘x’ value,
• LMC and RMC - abbreviations for the Left Mouse button Click and the Right Mouse button Click.

To run structure definition start the Robot program (press the appropriate icon or select the command
from the taskbar). The vignette window (described in chapter 2.1 of the manual) will be displayed on

the screen and the last but one icon in the first row (Frame 3D Design) should be
selected.

NOTE: The American section database (AISC) has been used in this example.

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 167


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

12.1 Structure Model Definition

PERFORMED OPERATION DESCRIPTION

Selects the BARS layout from the list of available Robot


Millennium layouts.
Structure Model/Bars

While the graphical field is displaying The structure will be presented as projected on the yz plane
the structure view as active (x coordinate is assumed to equal 0).
(highlighted), select from the menu:
View / Projection / Yz

LMC on the Bar Type field and select Selects bar properties. The section from the American
Column section database (AISC) has been used.
LMC on the Section field and select Note: If the W 12x96 section is not available on the list, the

(W 12x96) user should press the ( ) button located beside the
Section field and add this section to the active section
list in the New section dialog box

LMC on the Beginning field Starts definition of bars in the structure (structure columns).
(background color changes to green)

Enter the following points in the Defines four columns of the frame.
Beginning and End fields.
(0,0,0) (0,0,11.5), Add
(0,0,11.5) (0,0,23), Add
(0,20,0) (0,20,11.5), Add
(0,20,11.5) (0,20,23), Add

LMC on the Bar Type field in the Bars Starts definition of a beam and selects its properties. The
dialog box and select Beam LMC on section from the American section database (AISC) has
the Section field and select (HP been used.
10x42) Note: If the HP 10x42 section is not available on the list, the

user should press the ( ) button located beside the
Section field and add this section to the active section
list in the New section dialog box

LMC on the Beginning field Starts definition of beams in the structure.


(background color changes to green)

Enter the following points in the Defines two beams.


Beginning and End fields.
(0,0,11.5) (0,20,11.5), Add
(0,0,23) (0,20,23), Add

LMC on the Bar Type field in the Bars Starts definition of bracings and selects their properties. The
dialog box and select Simple bar section from the American section database (AISC) has
LMC on the Section field and select (L been used.
1.5x1.5x0.1875) Note: If the L 1.5x1.5x0.1875 section is not available on the

list, the user should press the ( ) button located
beside the Section field and add this section to the
active section list in the New section dialog box

LMC on the Beginning field Starts definition of bracings in the structure.


(background color changes to green)

168 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Enter the following points to the Defines four bracings.


Beginning and End fields.
(0,0,0) (0,20,11.5), Add
(0,20,0) (0,0,11.5), Add
(0,0,11.5) (0,20,23), Add
(0,20,11.5) (0,0,23), Add

LMC on the field for selection of the Selects the Robot Millennium layout which allows support
Robot Millennium program layouts definition.
Structure Model/Supports

In the Supports dialog box, LMC on Selects the structure nodes for which supports will be
the Current Selection field (the cursor defined.
is blinking in the field)

Switch to the graphic viewer; pressing Selected nodes 1 and 4 will be entered to the Current.
the left mouse button select with the Selection field.
window all the lower column nodes

From the Supports dialog box select Selects the support type.
the fixed support icon (the icon will be
highlighted)

LMC on the Apply button Selected support type will be assigned to the chosen
structure nodes; the defined structure is displayed in the
drawing below.

LMC on the field for selection of the Selection of the initial Robot Millennium program layout.
Robot Millennium program layout
Structure Model/Start

View / Projection / YZ

View / Display
Move to the Structure tab
Switch on display of numbers of
nodes and bars as well as supports.

Geometry / Properties / Sections Selects the bar section.

From the Sections dialog box select The selected section will be assigned to the bars created by
the HP 12x63 section the dragging option - e.g. Translate with the Drag option
turned on.

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 169


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

LMC on the Close button Closes the Sections dialog box.

View / Projection / 3d xyz Selects the isometric structure view.

LMC in the list of the bar selection Selects all columns and beams, i.e. bars 1 to 6.

Enter the numbers of all columns


and beams
press Enter on the keyboard

LMC in the list of the node selection Selects beginning and end nodes of both beams, i.e. nodes
2 3 5 6.
Enter the numbers of the beam
nodes
press Enter on the keyboard

Edit / Edit / Translate Opens the Translation dialog box.

LMC on the Drag check box Turns on the dragging option so that the successive copies
of the selected nodes are joined together by bars.

LMC on the Number of repetitions Defines the number of repetitions for the performed
field and enter the value: (2) translation operations.

LMC on the Translation vector field Defines the translation vector.


and enter the vector: (20,0,0)

LMC on the Execute button Copies the selected elements.

LMC on the View edit viewer Click on the screen ouside the structure to clear the bar and
node selection lists.

LMC in the list of the bar selection Selects all bracings, i.e. bars 7 to 10.

Enter the numbers of all bracings


press Enter on the keyboard

LMC on the Number of repetitions Defines the number of repetitions for the performed
field and enter the value: (1) translation operations.

LMC on the Translation vector field Defines the translation vector.


and enter the vector: (40,0,0)

Execute, Close Translates the bracings and closes the Translation dialog
box.

170 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

12.2 Definition of the PushOver Analysis Case

LMC on the box for selection of the Selects the Robot Millennium program layout allowing for
Robot Millennium layout the structure load definition.
Structure Model/Loads

LMC on the New button located in Defines a dead load (self-weight) with a standard name
the Load Types dialog box DL1.

Analysis / Analysis types Opens the Analysis Type dialog box.

LMC on the New button Opens the New Case Definition dialog box.

LMC on the OK button Opens the Modal Analysis Parameters dialog box.

LMC on the OK button Defines a new modal analysis case with the default
parameters assigned.

LMC on the New button Opens the New Case Definition dialog box.

LMC on the PushOver option Opens the dialog box for definition of the PushOver analysis
LMC on the OK button case.

LMC on the Case field: PushOver Defines the name of the PushOver case.

LMC on the Node number field: (3) Defines the controlling node, the displacement of this node
is checked at each load increment.

LMC on the Direction field, select: Defines direction of an external factor affecting the structure
(UX+) in the global coordinate system.

LMC on the Maximum displacement Defines the maximum displacement in the selected node.
field: 8 (in)

LMC on the According to unit Defines the method of the load definition.
acceleration in the given direction
option

LMC on the Parameters button Opens the dialog box for definition of the Arc-length method
parameters.

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 171


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

LMC on the Load increment number Defines the number of the load increments.
field: (20)

LMC on the OK button Applies the changes and closes the dialog box.

While in the Push over dialog box Closes the Push over dialog box and defines a new
LMC on the OK button PushOver case.

LMC on the Close button in the Closes the Analysis Type dialog box.
Analysis Type dialog box

LMC in the list of the load case Selects the modal case.
selection

select the modal case: (2)

Loads / Load Definition Opens the Load Definition dialog box.

While on the Self-weight and mass Opens the Nodal mass dialog box.
tab
LMC on the Added masses - nodes

icon

LMC on the X field: 22 (kip) Defines the values of the added masses.
LMC on the Y field: 22 (kip)
LMC on the Z field: 22 (kip)

LMC on the Add button Accepts the definition of added masses.

While in the Load Definition dialog Applies the added masses to all the nodes.
box LMC on the Apply to field: (all) Closes the Load Definition dialog box.
Apply, Close

12.3 Definition of a Non-linear Hinge

LMC on the box for selection of the Selects the initial layout of the Robot Millennium program.
Robot Millennium program layouts
Structure Model / Start

Geometry / Additional attributes / Opens the Non-linear Hinges dialog box.


Non-linear Hinges

LMC on the New hinge type icon Opens the Non-linear Hinge Definition dialog box.

LMC on the Label field: Hinge_1 Defines the name of the hinge label.

LMC on the Definition of hinge Opens the Definition of non-linear hinge model dialog
model button box.

LMC on the Model name field: Defines the name of the hinge model.
Model_MY

172 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

LMC on the Add button Creates the hinge model.

LMC on the Points tab Switches to the Points tab.

LMC on the following fields: Creates a diagram of the hinge model (see the drawing
• point B column X: (0.01) below).
• point B column Y: (37)
• point C column X: (0.05)
• point C column Y: (45)
• point D column X: (0.05)
• point D column Y: (8)
• point E column X: (0.09)
• point E column Y: (8)

LMC on the Parameters tab Switches to the Parameters tab.

LMC on the Type field, select: Defines the type of the hinge, in that case it is moment
(moment-rotation) versus rotation, thus the previously defined column Y stands
for moment and X stands for rotation.

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 173


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

LMC on the Unloading method and Defines the unloading method, in that case return is carried
select: (elastic) out along the same path as while loading.

LMC on the OK button Accepts the definition of the hinge model, closes the dialog
box.

While in the Non-linear Hinge It activates the MY option.


Definition dialog box:
LMC on the MY option
(if necessary LMC on the other
check boxes to deactivate them)

LMC on the MY field and select: Selects previously defined hinge model.
(Model_MY)

Add, Close Accepts the definition of the hinge label and closes the Non-
linear Hinge Definition dialog box.

While in the Non-linear Hinges Selects the previously defined hinge label.
dialog box:
select the Hinge_1 label

LMC on the relative option Sets the relative postion on the bar as x=0.1.
LMC on the x= field: (0.1)

LMC on the Current Selection field: Applies the label Hinge_1 at the relative position x=0.1 to
1, 3, 15, 17, 25, 27, Apply the lower colums.

LMC on the Current Selection field: Applies the label Hinge_1 at the relative position x=0.1 to
11to14, 19to24, Apply the all beams except for the ones from the braced walls.

LMC on the relative option Sets the relative postion on the bar to x=0.9.
LMC on the x= field: (0.9)

LMC on the Current Selection field: Applies the label Hinge_1 at the relative position x=0.9 to all
11to14, 19to24, Apply the beams except for the ones from the braced walls.

Close Closes the Non-linear Hinges dialog box.

174 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

12.4 Structure Analysis

Starts calculations of the defined structure

LMC on the box for selection of the Opens the RESULTS layout of the Robot Millennium
Robot Millennium program layouts program. The screen will be divided into three parts: a
Results/Results graphic viewer containing the structure model, the
Diagrams dialog box and a table with reaction values.

12.5 Result Analysis

Displays results for the push over case.


Select: (3: Push over)

Select the NTM tab from the Displays the structure MY moment for the selected load
Diagrams dialog box case.
Turn on the MY moment option

Select the Deformation tab from the Displays the structure deformation for the selected load
Diagrams dialog box case.
Turn on the Deformation option

LMC on the Apply button Displays structure deformation and MY moment diagram.

Loads / Select Case Component Opens the Case component dialog box.

LMC on the Current component field Goes through the components up to the Number of
components.

Close Closes the Case component dialog box.

Turn off the MY moment and Turns off result display.


Deformation option in the dialog box,
Apply

12.6 Results - Diagrams of PushOver Analysis

Results / Advanced / PushOver Opens the Pushover analysis dialog box.


Analysis - Diagrams

LMC on the Add button Opens the Diagram definition dialog box.

LMC on the UX option Displays the UX displacement diagram.

LMC on the Case field and select: Selects the PushOver case.
(3: Push over)

LMC on the Node field: (3) Selects node 3 for which the UX displacement diagram is
created.

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 175


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Add, Close Confirms the definition of the diagram and closes the
Diagram definition dialog box.
Note that the default diagram name is:
3_Displacement_UX_3

While in the Pushover analysis Moves all the diagrams from the Available diagrams panel
dialog box: to the Presented diagrams panel.
LMC on the button

LMC on the Apply button Opens the Diagrams of push over analysis viewer with
Presented diagrams displayed.

While in the Diagrams of push over Closes the Diagrams of push over analysis viewer and
analysis viewer LMC on the cross in the Pushover analysis dialog box.
the upper right corner
While in the Pushover analysis
dialog box LMC on the Close button

12.7 Results – Capacity Curve

Results / Advanced / Capacity curve Opens the PushOver curve dialog box.

LMC on the Apply button Opens the Pushover curve diagrams viewer with
Displacement - reaction sum diagram displayed.

LMC on the Diagram type field and Selects the type of a diagram to be displayed in the viewer.
select:
(Capacity spectrum)

LMC on the Selected demand Activates the display of selected demand spectrum.
spectrum option

LMC on the Lines of constant period Activates the display of constant period lines.
option

LMC on the Reduced spectra Activates the display of reduced spectra.


(damping) option

LMC on the Histeretic damping B Selects the structure type B.


option

LMC on the Apply button Displays the capacity curve.

176 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

13. RC Beam Design - ACI Code (Robot Stand-Alone


Mode)
This example presents the definition, analysis and design of an RC beam.
Data units: (ft), (kip), (kip*ft), (ksi).
Code: ACI 318/99

The following rules apply during beam definition:


• any icon symbol means that the relevant icon is pressed with the left mouse button,
• ( x ) stands for selection of the ‘x’ option in the dialog box or entering the ‘x’ value,
• LMC and RMC - abbreviations for the Left Mouse button Click and the Right Mouse button Click,
• LMD and RMD - abbreviations for the Left Mouse button Double click and the Right Mouse button
Double click.

To run structure definition start the Robot program (press the appropriate icon or select the command
from the taskbar). The vignette window (described in chapter 2.1 of the manual) will be displayed on

the screen and the icon in the third row (RC Beam Design) should be selected.

NOTE: The American material database has been used in this example.

13.1 Configuration (Program Preferences)

PERFORMED OPERATION DESCRIPTION

Tools / Preferences Opens the Preferences dialog box.

LMC on the Languages option in the Selects the Languages option dialog box.
Preferences tree

LMC on the Regional Settings field Defines the United States settings as default Regional
and select United States Settings.

OK Sets the new preferences and closes the dialog box.

Tools / Job Preferences Opens the Job Preferences dialog box.

LMC on the Units and Format option Selects the Units and Format option dialog box.
in the Job Preferences tree

LMC on the Imperial button inside Defines Imperial units as Default Units.
the Default Units field

OK Sets the new preferences and closes the dialog box.

NOTE: It is necessary to perform actions described above if the program has not been
installed in the English version or the Windows® operating system has not had the US
regional settings.

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 177


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

13.2 Beam Design

PERFORMED OPERATION DESCRIPTION

Twice LMC on the Add Span button


in the Elevation Definition dialog
box

LMC on the Cantilever Right field Defines a right side cantilever.

LMC on the Span Geometry tab Switches to the Span Geometry tab.

Select graphically the cantilever.


LMC in the Length field and enter
value 5.0,
Apply

LMC on the middle span on the Selects graphically the middle span of the beam.
Elevation - Beam viewer

LMC in the Length field and enter Defines the middle span length using a simple mathematical
12+1/2*12= operation in Robot Millennium edit field.
Apply

LMC in the Width field (Left support) Defines the support width using a unit conversion in Robot
and enter 1ft8in= Millennium edit field.
LMC on the Width field (Right
support) and enter 1ft8in=
Apply

LMC in the middle span in the Selects graphically the middle span of the beam.
Elevation - Beam viewer

LMC on the h field (Basic


Dimensions) in the Section
Definition dialog box and enter
value 30.0 (in),
Apply

LMC on the box for selection of the Selects the Robot Millennium program layout allowing for
Robot Millennium layout the beam opening definition. The screen will be divided into
RC Beam / Beam - openings three parts: a graphic viewer containing the beam elevation
at the upper side, a Beam - openings table in bottom left
side and the Openings dialog box at bottom right side.

LMC on the middle span on the Selects graphically the middle span of the beam.
Elevation - Beam viewer

LMC in the Name field of the Defines the opening name.


Openings dialog box and enter A as
the opening name

LMC on the Start field and select left Defines the coordinate system of the opening position.
upper

178 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

LMC on the X Local field and enter Defines the opening position on the span.
value 8.5, next LMC on the Z Local
field and enter value 2.0

LMC on the Adjoining beam option Defines the opening type.

LMC on the Lx field and enter value Defines opening dimensions.


1.0, next LMC on the Lz field and
enter value 2.0

Add Adds the A opening to the span.

LMC on the cantilever on the Selects graphically the beam’s cantilever.


Elevation - Beam viewer

LMC on the Name field of the Defines the opening name.


Openings dialog box and enter B as
the opening name

LMC on the Round option Defines the opening type.

LMC on the X Local field and enter Defines the opening position on the span.
value 2.0, next LMC on the Z Local
field and enter value 1.0

LMC on the D field and enter value Defines opening dimensions.


1.0

Add Adds the B opening to the span.

LMC on the box for selection of the Selects the Robot Millennium program layout allowing for
Robot Millennium layout the beam loads definition. The screen will be divided into
RC Beam / Beam - loads three parts: a graphic viewer containing the beam static
model at the upper side, a Beam - loads table in bottom left
side and the Loads dialog box at bottom right side.

Defines a self-weight load.


, Add

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 179


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Select live load

LMC on the Value p1 field and enter


value 2.0,
Add

Select concentrated

Select live load

LMC on the Suspended option

LMC on the Value F field and enter


value 12.0,
Add

Analysis / Calculation options Opens the Calculation options dialog box.

LMC on the Concrete tab. LMC in the Defines concrete parameters.


list of the typical concrete resistance.
Select fc’=4.0 ksi concrete

LMC on the Longitudinal Defines longitudinal reinforcement steel grade.


reinforcement tab. LMC in the steel
list. Select Grade 60 steel.

LMC on the None button (Bar list) to Defines the longitudinal reinforcement acceptable bar list.
remove the default bars list.
LMC in the #8, #9, #10, #11 options
to define acceptable bar list

LMC on the Transversal Defines the transversal reinforcement steel grade.


reinforcement tab. LMC on the steel
list. Select Grade 40 steel.

LMC on the #6 option to add bar #6 Defines transversal reinforcement acceptable bar list.
to acceptable bar list.

LMC on the Save As … button Opens Enter the name dialog box.

LMC on the edit control, highlight Saves user calculation options.


Standard text and enter test_rnf as
a new name,
OK, OK

Analysis / Reinforcement Pattern Opens the Reinforcement Pattern dialog box.

180 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

LMC on the Transversal


reinforcement tab

LMC on the Suspended load button

LMC on the second Reinforcement See the picture on the next page.
Method option,
OK

LMC on the Structural Reinforcement


tab

LMC on the Consideration of load


capacity option,
OK

Analysis / Calculation Opens the Calculation Option Set dialog box.

LMC on the When the calculations


are completed go to the: Results
layout option

LMC on the Calculations button Starts the calculations

LMC on the OK button in the Accepts the calculation warning: Axial force will not be taken
Reinforcement concrete and into consideration in calculations.
Calculation Errors dialog boxes.

LMC on the Span option Defines range of the graphic viewer.

Select Reinforcement

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 181


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Select Deflection

LMC on the box for selection of the Selects the Robot Millennium program layout allowing for
Robot Millennium layout the beam reinforcement presentation. The screen will be
RC Beam / Beam - reinforcement divided into four parts: two graphic viewers containing the
beam elevation at the upper right side and beam section
at the upper left side, a Beam - Reinforcement Table
at bottom right side and Reinforcing bars dialog box
at bottom left side.

Results / Calculation note Opens the Calculation note dialog box.

LMC on OK button Generates the calculation note.

LMC on the cross in the upper right Closes the Calculation note editor.
corner

File / Save Project Component As Opens the Project Component Save dialog box.

LMC on the cross near Standard Unfolds the Standard Level sub-tree.
Level field in the Structure tree

LMD on the Beam1 field Highlights “Beam1” - standard sub-project name.

Enter “My beam” in the highlighted Renames the subproject name.


field,
OK

LMC on the OK button in the Robot Accepts data saving on the standard project.
message box

Enter the following text: “Examples Saves Robot Millennium project as “Examples Beam
Beam ACI” in the File Name field in ACI.rtd” file.
Widows® Save As… dialog box,
Save

182 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Results / Drawings Generates Final Drawings. The Robot Millennium program


layout is changed automatically.

File / Print Opens the Print dialog box.

OK Prints final drawings of reinforcement.

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 183


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

14. RC Column Design - ACI Code (Robot Stand-Alone


Mode)
This example presents the definition, analysis and design of an RC column.
Data units: (ft), (kip), (kip*ft), (ksi).
Code: ACI 318/99

The following rules apply during column definition:


• any icon symbol means that the relevant icon is pressed with the left mouse button,
• ( x ) stands for selection of the ‘x’ option in the dialog box or entering the ‘x’ value,
• LMC and RMC - abbreviations for the Left Mouse button Click and the Right Mouse button Click.
• LMD and RMD - abbreviations for the Left Mouse button Double click and the Right Mouse button
Double click.

To run structure definition start the Robot program (press the appropriate icon or select the command
from the taskbar). The vignette window (described in chapter 2.1 of the manual) will be displayed on

the screen and the icon in the third row (RC Column Design) should be selected.

NOTE: The American material database has been used in this example.

14.1 Configuration (Program Preferences)

PERFORMED OPERATION DESCRIPTION

Tools / Preferences Opens the Preferences dialog box.

LMC on the field Languages in Selects the Languages option tab.


Preferences tree

LMC on the Regional Settings field Defines the United States settings as default Regional
and select the United States Settings.

Tools / Job Preferences Opens the Job Preferences dialog box.

LMC on the field Units and Format in Selects the Units and Format option tab.
Job Preferences tree

LMC on the Imperial button inside Defines the Imperial units as Default Units.
the Default Units field

OK Applies new preference.

NOTE: It is necessary to perform actions described above if the program has not been
installed in the English version or the Windows® operating system has not had the US
regional settings.

184 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

14.2 Column Design

PERFORMED OPERATION DESCRIPTION

LMC on the b field on the Section Defines a column section width.


Definition dialog box and enter value
18.0 (in)

LMC on the h field on the Section Defines a column section height.


Definition dialog box and enter value
18.0 (in)

LMC on the Label field and enter Defines a column section name.
18in-18in

OK Applies the section definition.

Structure / Dimensions Opens the Elevation Dimensions dialog box.

LMC on the L field and enter value Defines the column height.
16.0

LMC on the Hb field and enter value Defines a beam thickness.


2.0

LMC on the Hp field and enter 10in = Defines a slab thickness using a unit conversion in Robot
edit field.

OK Accepts definition of the Elevation Dimensions.

Structure / Buckling Length Opens the Buckling Length dialog box.

LMC on the Sway option inside the Defines the structure type in the Y direction.
Direction Y field

Opens the Sway structure dialog box.

inside the Direction Y


field

Defines the buckling coefficient 1.60 for typical structure -


column in a weak beam.

, OK

Opens the Non - Sway structure dialog box.

inside the Direction Z


field

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 185


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Opens the Adjoining Beam Parameters - Z - ACI318/99


dialog box.

LMC

Unfold the Section list at the second Selects the left side adjoining beam section.
row. Select the B8x16 section

LMC on the Length field at the Defines the left side adjoining beam length.
second row. Enter value 25.0

Unfold the Section list at the third Selects the right side adjoining beam section.
row. Select the B8x16 section

LMC on the Length field at the third Define the right side adjoining beam length.
row. Enter value 25.0

Unfold the Section list at the fourth Selects the top column section.
row. Select the 18in-18in section

LMC on the Length field at the fourth Define the top column length.
row. Enter value 25.0

OK Define the buckling coefficient 0.68 by frame node stiffness


(adjoining element stiffness).

Apply, Close Applies definition of the Buckling Length.

Structure / Loads Opens the Loads dialog box.

LMC on the Nature at first record of Selects Nature of the new load case.
Loads table field. Unfold list and
select the dead load

Enter the following forces in the Defines a dead load with a standard name DL1
N, Myt, Myb, Mnsy/My, Mzt, Mzb, β fields
(300.0, 30.0, 30.0, 0.10, 25.0, 20.0,
1.0)

LMC on the Nature at second record Selects Nature of the new load case.
of Loads table field. Unfold list and
select the live load

Enter the following forces in the Defines a live load with a standard name LL1
N, Myt, Myb, Mnsy/My, Mzt, Mzb, β fields
(250.0, 10.0, 20.0, 0.50, 10.0, 20.0,
0.50)

LMC on the Nature at third record of Selects Nature of the new load case.
Loads table field. Unfold list and
select the wind

Enter the following forces in the Defines a wind load with a standard name WIND1
N, Myt, Myb, Mnsy/My, Mzt, Mzb, β fields
(20.0, 10.0, 5.0, 1.0, 30.0, 80.0, 0.0),
OK

186 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Analysis / Calculation options Opens the Calculation options dialog box.

LMC in the C field inside Cover Defines a size of the cover.


frame and enter value 2.0in

LMC on the Fixed option Defines the cover size as a fixed value.

LMC on the tab Concrete. LMC in the Defines concrete parameters.


list of the typical concrete resistance.
Select fc’=5.5ksi concrete

LMC on the Longitudinal Changes to the Longitudinal reinforcement tab.


reinforcement tab

LMC on the None button in Bar list Defines the longitudinal reinforcement acceptable bar list.
frame to remove the default bar list.
LMC on the #9, #10, #11 option to
define acceptable bar list

LMC on the Transversal Changes to the Transversal reinforcement tab.


reinforcement tab

LMC on the #3 option to switch off Defines the transversal reinforcement acceptable bar list.
this bar and LMC on the #6 option to
add bar #6 to acceptable bar list

LMC on the Save As … button Opens the Enter the name dialog box.

LMC on the edit field, highlight Saves user calculation options.


Standard text and enter test_rnf as a
new name,
OK
OK

Analysis / Calculations Opens the Calculation Option Set dialog box.

LMC on the When the calculations Defines change of the Robot Millennium layout after
are completed go to the: Results calculation.
layout option
LMC on the Calculations button

LMC on the first field in the


Intersection dialog box

Press Down Arrow on the keyboard Changes the current combination.

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 187


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

LMC on the Close button in the Closes the Intersection dialog box.
Intersection dialog box

LMC on the box for selection of the Selects the Robot Millennium program layout allowing for
Robot Millennium layout the beam reinforcement presentation. The screen will be
RC Column / Column - divided into four parts: two graphic viewers containing the
reinforcement beam elevation at the upper right side and beam section at
the upper left side, a Column - Reinforcement Table at
bottom right side and Reinforcing bars dialog box at
bottom left side.

File / Save Project Component As Opens the Project Component Save dialog box.

LMC on the cross next to the Expands the Standard Level tree.
Standard Level field in the Structure
tree

LMD on the Column1 field Highlights “Column1” - standard sub project name.

Enter text “My column” in the Renames the subproject name.


highlight field,
OK

LMC on the OK button in the Robot Accepts data saving on the standard project.
message box

Enter the following text: “Examples Saves the Robot Millennium project as “Examples Column
Column ACI” in File Name field in the ACI.rtd” file.
Widows® Save As… dialog box
Save

Results / Drawings Generates Final Drawings. The Robot Millennium program


layout is changed automatically.

LMC on the box for selection of the Selects the Robot Millennium program layout allowing for
Robot Millennium layout the column reinforcement presentation.
RC Column / Column -
reinforcement

Analysis / Reinforcement Pattern Opens the Reinforcement Pattern dialog box.

LMC on the Shapes tab

LMC on the icon near the Stirrup Opens the Stirrup dialog box.
option

Changes the Stirrups shape.

, OK

LMC on the icon near the Main Opens the Main dialog box.
option

Changes the main reinforcement shape.

,
OK, OK

188 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Analysis / Calculation Opens the Calculation Option Set dialog box.

LMC on the When the calculations Defines change of the Robot Millennium layout after
are completed go to the: Current calculation.
layout option,
Calculations

LMC on the No. field in the first Selects the main reinforcement.
record in Reinforcement Table -
General tab

LMC on the Shape Parameters tab in


the Bar properties dialog box

LMC on the C field and enter value Defines the hook length.
3in=,
Apply

File / Save Project Component As Opens the Project Component Save dialog box.

Creates a new project component with a standard name


Column2.

Enter the following text: “My column Renames a standard component.


v.2” in highlight field,
OK

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 189


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Analysis / Drawing Parameters Opens the Drawing Parameters dialog box.

LMC on the Add drawing to the list


option,
OK

Results / Drawings Generates Final Drawings. Robot Millennium program


layout is changed automatically.

Insert / Reinforcement table Adds new drawings with global reinforcement table.

190 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

15. RC Foundation Design - ACI Code (Robot Stand-Alone


Mode)
This example presents the definition, analysis and design of an RC spread footing.
Data units: (ft), (kip), (kip*ft), (ksi).
Code: ACI 318/99

The following rules apply during foundation definition:


• any icon symbol means that the relevant icon is pressed with the left mouse button,
• ( x ) stands for selection of the ‘x’ option in the dialog box or entering the ‘x’ value,
• LMC and RMC - abbreviations for the Left Mouse button Click and the Right Mouse button Click.
• LMD and RMD - abbreviations for the Left Mouse button Double click and the Right Mouse button
Double click.

To run structure definition start the Robot program (press the appropriate icon or select the command
from the taskbar). The vignette window (described in chapter 2.1 of the manual) will be displayed on

the screen and the icon in the third row (Foundation Design) should be selected.

NOTE: The American material and soil databases have been used in this example.

15.1 Configuration (Program Preferences)

PERFORMED OPERATION DESCRIPTION

Tools / Preferences Opens the Preferences dialog box.

LMC on the Languages option in the Selects the Languages option dialog box.
Preferences tree

LMC on the Regional Settings field Defines the United States settings as default Regional
and select United States Settings.

OK Sets the new preferences and closes the dialog box.

Tools / Job Preferences Opens the Job Preferences dialog box.

LMC on the Units and Format option Selects the dialog box for the Units and Format option.
in the Job Preferences tree

LMC on the Imperial button inside Defines Imperial units as Default Units.
the Default Units field

LMC on the cross-box next to the Unfold the Units and Format sub tree.
Units and Format field in the Job
Preferences tree

LMC on the Forces in Units and Selects the dialog box for Forces option.
Format

Changes the unit display precision.


Click twice next to the Stress unit
define field

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 191


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

OK Sets the new preferences and closes the dialog box.

Note: It is necessary to perform actions described above if the program has not been
installed in the English version or the Windows® operating system has not had the US
regional settings.

15.2 Simple Footing Design

PERFORMED OPERATION DESCRIPTION

Enter the following geometry Defines the foundation geometry.


parameters in the A and B field.
A=9.0, B=9.0, Apply

LMC on the Pier tab and change the Selects the pier type.
Pier column type to Plain,
Apply

Analysis / Calculation options Opens the Calculation options dialog box.

LMC on the Concrete tab. LMC on Defines concrete parameters.


the list of the typical concrete
resistance. Select fc’=4.0ksi concrete

LMC on the Longitudinal Defines the longitudinal reinforcement steel grade.


reinforcement tab. LMC on the steel
list. Select Grade 40 steel

LMC on the None button (Bar list) to Defines the longitudinal reinforcement acceptable bar list.
remove the default bar list.
LMC on the #6, #7, #8, #9 options to
define acceptable bar list

LMC on the Transversal Defines the transversal reinforcement steel grade.


reinforcement tab. LMC on the steel
list. Select Grade 40 steel.

LMC on the #3 option to switch off Defines the transversal reinforcement acceptable bar list.
this bar and LMC on the #6 option to
add bar #6 to acceptable bar list.

LMC on the Save As … button Opens the Enter the name dialog box.

LMC on the edit control, highlight Saves user calculation options.


Standard text and enter test_rnf as
a new name, OK

OK Closes the Calculation options dialog box.

Selects the Robot Millennium program layout allowing for


the foundations load definition. The screen will be divided
Foundations / Foundations - load into four parts: a graphic viewer containing the foot model at
the upper right side, the Foundations - load and
Foundations - site dialog boxes at upper central and upper
left side and a table with foundation load values at center.

192 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Selects the forces type.

Enter the following forces in the Defines a dead load with a standard name DL1
N, Fx, Fy, Mx, My fields
(55.0, 10.0, -20.0, 15.0, -15.0),
Add

Selects the type of a load case: live.


live load

Enter the following forces in the Defines a live load with a standard name LL1
N, Fx, Fy, Mx, My fields
(30.0, 10.0, -20.0, 15.0, -15.0),
Add

Selects the type of a load case: wind.


wind

Enter the following forces in the Defines a live load with a standard name WIND1
N, Fx, Fy, Mx, My fields
(20.0, -25.0, 10.0, -10.0, -25.0),
Add

LMC on the box for selection of the Selects the Robot Millennium program layout allowing for
Robot Millennium layout the foundations soil definition. The screen will be divided
Foundations / Foundations - soil into two parts: Foundations - site dialog boxes at upper left
side and Foundations - soil dialog box at central with
graphic viewer containing the foot model and soil layers, soil
table and backfill parameters.

LMC in the Backfill heights N1 field Defines a Backfill height.


and enter the value: (2.0)

LMC on the Pier level Na field and Defines a column Pier level using a Robot Millennium
enter 8in= control unit conversion (in -> ft).

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 193


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

LMC on the Minimum reference level Defines a Minimum reference level.


Nf field and enter the value (-1.5)

LMC on the Name field in the first Selects the typical soil (Very fine sands) from Robot
record in soil table and unfold the list Millennium soil database.
of available soils. Select the Very fine
sands.

Switch on the Stress Allowable


option.
LMC on the edit field (Stress) and
enter the value (0.0138).

LMC on the Apply button Applies the soil definition.

LMC on the box for selection of the Selects the Robot Millennium program layout allowing for a
Robot Millennium layout presentation of foundations calculation result. The screen
Foundations / Foundations - result will be divided into two parts: a graphic viewer containing the
foot model at the left side, Foundations - result dialog
boxes at right side.

LMC on the Capacity button in the Selects the design combination for capacity.
Foundations - Results dialog box

194 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

LMC on the Punching / Shear Selects the design combination for punching.
button in the Foundations - Results
dialog box

Analysis / Calculation Opens the Calculation Option Set dialog box.

LMC on the Calculations button Starts the Calculations and optimization for the defined
foundation.

LMC on the box for selection of the Selects the Robot Millennium program layout allowing for
Robot Millennium layout a presentation of foundation reinforcement. The screen will
Foundations / Foundations - be divided into five parts: three graphic viewers containing
Reinforcement footing model projections, Foundation - Reinforcement
Table and Reinforcing bars dialog box.

LMC on the No. field in the fourth Selects the bottom reinforcement in Y direction.
record on the Reinforcement Table -
General tab.

Opens the Main Bar shape dialog box.

Selects the new shape.

,
OK

Apply Applies the new shape to reinforcement in Y direction.

LMC on the No. field in the fifth Selects the bottom reinforcement in X direction.
record on the Reinforcement Table -
General tab

Opens the Main Bar shape dialog box.

Selects the new shape.

,
OK

Apply Applies the new shape for reinforcement in X direction.

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 195


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

File / Save Project Component As Opens the Project Component dialog box.

Creates a new project component with a standard name


Foundation2.

Enter the following text: “foot A” in Renames a standard component.


the highlighted field,
OK

Enter the following text: “Examples Saves the Robot Millennium project as “Examples Foot
Foot ACI” in File Name field in the ACI.rtd” file.
Widows® Save As… dialog box,
Save

Results / Drawings Generates Final Drawings. The Robot Millennium program


layout is changed automatically.

File / Print Opens the Print dialog box.

OK Prints the “foot A” reinforcement.

196 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

16. Definition of a 2D Frame


The example presents the definition and analysis of a 2D steel frame as shown in the figure below.
Data units: (ft) and (kip).

The following rules apply during structure definition:


• any icon symbol means that the relevant icon is pressed with the left mouse button,
• ( x ) stands for selection of the ‘x’ option in the dialog box or entering the ‘x’ value,
• LMC and RMC - abbreviations for the Left Mouse button Click and the Right Mouse button Click.

To run structure definition start the Robot program (press the appropriate icon or select the command
from the taskbar). The vignette window (described in chapter 2.1 of the manual) will be displayed on

the screen and the first icon in the first row (Frame 2D Design) should be selected.

NOTE: The American section database (AISC) has been used in this example.

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 197


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

16.1 Structure Definition

16.1.1 Definition of a Working Language and Codes

PERFORMED OPERATION DESCRIPTION

Tools / Preferences Opens the Preferences dialog box shown in the figure
below which allows to select/modify the Robot Millennium
program parameters.

Place the cursor in the Languages Setting regional parameters results in adjusting national
line and select the United States codes, material and regulations.
option in the unfolded list of available
languages

Accept Closes the Preferences dialog box and saves the changes
made.

Tools / Job Preferences Opens the Job Preferences dialog box which allows to
select/modify the Robot Millennium program parameters.
Compare the code and actions correctness to the settings
shown in the figures below.

198 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

OK Closes the Job Preferences dialog box and saves the


changes made.

16.1.2 Structure Axis Definition

Geometry / Axis Definition Opens the Structural Axis dialog box which is used to
define the structure's axes.

While being on the X tab set the Defines parameters of the vertical structural axes.
Numbering option as A B C…
switch to the Position field and enter:
{0} Insert,
{18} Insert,
{32} Insert

Switch to the Z tab, enter the Defines parameters of the horizontal structural axes.
following coordinates of the axes:
{0.0} Insert,
{10.5} Insert,
{14.0} Insert,
Numbering: 1, 2, 3…

Apply, Close Creates the defined structural axes and closes


the Structural axis dialog box.

If the axes are not visible the user The initial view of the structure should be displayed on the
should select the View / Zoom / screen.
Zoom All command from the main
menu

16.1.3 Structure Axis Modification


RMC on the symbol (in the example Opens the Structural Axis Modification dialog box, which
B) referring to the required axis, is used for structural axis modification as shown in the
select the Object Properties figure below.
command in the context menu

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 199


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Switch to the Distance field and enter Sets a displacement value for the selected structure axis
the {2.00} distance or set it
graphically

Apply, Close Closes the Structural Axis Modification dialog box.


Defined structural axes are shown in the figure below.

16.1.4 Column and Beam Definition

Selects the BARS layout from the list of available Robot


Millennium layouts.
Structure Model/Bars

LMC on the Bar Type field and select Selects bar properties. The section from the American
Column section database (AISC) has been used.
LMC on the Section field and select Note: If the W 8x28 section is not available on the list, the

(W 8x28) user should press the ( ) button located beside the
Section field and add this section to the active section
list in the New Section dialog box.

LMC on the Beginning field Starts definition of bars in the structure (structure columns).
(background color changes to green)

200 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Switch to the graphic viewer and Defines three columns of the frame.
indicate by means of the mouse the
following intersection points of the
consecutive axes.
- A1-A3,
- B1-B3,
- C1-C2

LMC on the Bar Type field and select Selects bar properties.
Beam Note: If the W 10x45 section is not available on the list, the
LMC on the Section field and select user should repeat the operations as in the case of
(W 10x45) the W 8x28 section.

LMC on the Beginning field Starts definition of a bar in the structure (structure beam).
(background color changes to green)

Switch to the graphic viewer and Defines the beam of the frame.
indicate by means of the mouse the
following intersection points of the
consecutive axes.
- C2-B2

Note: If the section database AISC is not available in the


Database field the user should add it. To do so select the
Tools / Job Preferences / Section Database command from
the menu. Click the icon (it adds a new database to the
list) and select AISC database from list of the available
section databases.

16.1.5 Truss Definition

Truss Section Definition

Opens the Sections dialog box.

Opens the New Section dialog box.

Set the following options: Closes the New Section dialog box. The P 2.5 section
Database: AISC, appears in the List of Active Sections, closes the Sections
Family: P, dialog box
Section: 2.5,
Add, Close, Close

Definition of the Upper Chord

LMC on the box for selection of the Selects the initial layout of the Robot Millennium program.
Robot Millennium program layouts
Structure Model / Start

Geometry / Objects / Arc Opens the Arc dialog box.

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 201


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Select the arc definition method: Defines arc. Closes the Arc dialog box.
Begin - Middle - End; Note: During the arc definition the last defined section
Enter the following coordinates of the (e.g. P 2.5) was applied.
arc points:
Begin. (0,14)
Middle (10,16)
End (20,14)
In the Sides field enter: 10,
Switch on the Fixed number and
Explode options
Apply, Close

The Lower Chord

RMC in the graphical viewer and Selects the recently defined arc.
indicate the Select option; then select
the arc with nodes by means of the
window-shaped cursor.

Edit / Edit / Translate Opens the Translation dialog box.

Set the following parameters in the


opened dialog box:
Translation Vector field: (0,10)
Edit Mode field: switch on the Copy
option, leave the default values of the
remaining parameters
Execute, Close

202 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Displays the initial view of the structure

Deselect the copied arc, then select


all nodes in the copied arc - indicate
them with the mouse cursor holding
the CTRL key pressed

View / Tables Opens the Tables: Data and Results dialog box.

Check out the Nodes option, OK Closes the Tables: Data and Results dialog box, displays
the Nodes table on the screen.

Windows / Tile Horizontally Displays simultaneously two windows on the screen: View
and Nodes

Switch to the Nodes table and select Selects the entire Z column.
entire Z table column (by clicking on
header) with CTRL key pressed

Place the mouse cursor in the Opens the context menu.


selected column and RMC

Select the Fill Special option in the Opens the Insert to Column dialog box (see below).
opened context menu

Enter a new value of the coordinate Assigns new value of Z coordinates of the selected nodes,
Z = 14, OK closes the Insert to Column dialog box.

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 203


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Close the Nodes table and


Selection dialog box

Click the button located in the Maximizes the View graphical viewer
View viewer

View / Zoom / Zoom All Displays the initial view of the structure

View / Display Opens the Display dialog box.

On the Structure tab indicate the Chooses the structure attributes for presentation, closes
Node numbers option, then switch to the Display dialog box.
the Others tab and turn off the
Structural axis option, Apply, OK

In order to delete the doubled nodes There appears the Structure Correction dialog box on
in the truss corners, select them the screen as shown in the figure below.
using the mouse cursor with the
CTRL button pressed. Then select
the Edit / Correct command

Deselect the Entire Structure option


(only the Geometrical Center should
be active). Set the value 0.03 in the
Precision field, Apply, Close

Posts

Opens the Bars dialog box.

LMC on the Bar Type field and select Selects bar properties.
Simple bar Note: If the P 2 section is not available on the list, the user
LMC on the Section field and select should repeat the operations as in the case of the P
(P 2) 2.5 section.

LMC on the Beginning field


(background color changes to green)

Switch to the graphic viewer, open Opens the Snap Settings dialog box.
the context menu and then select
Snap Settings / Snap Settings option

Select the Nodes option and deselect Chooses the parameters of cursor movement, closes
the remaining options, press the the Snap Settings dialog box.
Close button.

204 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Define posts by connecting the


nodes in the bottom and top chords
of the truss (9 posts) - see below

Cross-braces

LMC on the Bar Type field and select Selects bar properties.
Simple bar Note: If the P 1.5 section is not available on the list, the user
LMC on the Section field and select should repeat the operations as in the case of the P 2
(P 1.5) section.

LMC on the Beginning field


(background color changes to green)

Go to the graphical viewer and define


the diagonals as shown in the figure
below

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 205


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

16.1.6 Definition of Releases on the Ends of Diagonals

Geometry / Releases Opens the Releases dialog box to apply releases to the
truss diagonals.

Highlight the Pinned-Pinned release Go to the graphical viewer. Here, indicate all the diagonals
type, Close with the mouse cursor (the arrow with the release symbol).
It generates releases on element ends, closes the Releases
dialog box.

16.1.7 Support Definition

Selects the Supports layout from the list of available Robot


Millennium layouts.
Structure Model/Supports

Switch to the Supports dialog box, Selects the support type and nodes to which the supports
highlight Fixed in the support list and will be applied.
set the cursor in the selection field.
Go to the graphical viewer and select
two nodes: 1, 3 - located on axis 1

Apply Assigns the fixed support to the chosen nodes.

Highlight Pinned in the support list, Assigns the pinned support to the chosen node.
switch to the graphic viewer and
select the remaining node 5

206 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

16.1.8 Load Definition

Selects the Loads layout from the list of the available


Robot Millennium layouts.
Structure Model/Loads

Select Nature: dead in the Load Defines a dead load with a user-defined name self-weight.
Types dialog box and type self - Note: the program will define automatically the self-weight
weight in the Name field; then, click on all structure bars.
the New button

LMC on the Nature field - enter the Defines a dead load with the user-defined name dead.
name dead
LMC on the New button

Opens the Load Definition dialog box.

Opens the Uniform Load dialog box (see below).


Click the Uniform Load icon
located on the Bar tab

Type pz = -0.70 (kip/ft) in the Z edit Defines a value of the uniform load, closes the Uniform
field (the column of p loads (kip/ft)), Load dialog box.
Add

Switch to the Apply To field in the Applies the selected load to the chosen structure bar.
Load Definition dialog box and
indicate beam 4 in the graphical
viewer (right beam). The bar number
will appear in the Apply To field,
Apply

Opens the Nodal Force dialog box (see below).


Click the Nodal Force icon
located on the Node tab

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 207


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Type Fz = -1.40 (kip) in the Z edit Defines the force value, closes the Uniform Load dialog
field (the column of p loads (kip)), box.
Add

Place the cursor in the Apply to field Defines loads for the second load case.
then switch to the graphic viewer and
select all the nodes of the upper
chord. The node numbers will appear
in the Apply To field, Apply

Introduce the Nature: dead and Defines a dead load with the user-defined name dead.
Name: purlins in the Load Types
dialog box and click the New button

Opens the Bar Force dialog box.


Click the Bar Force icon
located on the Node tab

Enter the load Fz = -0.50 (kip).


Switch on the Absolute option in the
Coordinate field in the bottom part of
the dialog box. Type 6.00 (ft) in the "x
=" edit field, Add

After leaving the dialog box area, the Closes the Bar Force dialog box, applies the selected bar
cursor will automatically assume the force to the required position.
selection mode. In the graphical
viewer, indicate the right span,
ensuring that the arrows on the bar
are directed to the right, Apply

Reopen the Bar Force dialog box Closes the Bar Force dialog box, applies selected bar force
and repeat the above operation for to the required position.
the coordinates x = 12,0; adopt the
same value of the Fz force

Opens the Nodal Force dialog box.


Click the Nodal Force icon

Type Fz = -0.50 (kip) in the Z edit Applies the load value, closes the Nodal Force dialog box.
field, then click the Add button

208 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Place the cursor in the Apply to field Applies nodal forces to the selected nodes.
then switch to the graphic viewer and
select all the nodes of upper chord.
The node numbers will appear in the
Apply To field, Apply

Enter the Nature: live and Name: live Defines a live load with the user-defined name live.
in the Load Types dialog box and
click the New button

Opens the Trapezoidal Load dialog box.


Click the Trapezoidal Load icon
located on the Bar tab

Enter the following load values Enters the load values and closes the Trapezoidal Load
pz1 = - 0.35 (kip/ft) dialog box.
pz2 = - 0.70 (kip/ft)
and the relative coordinates
x1 = 0.0
x2 = 0.5
(switch on the Relative option in the
bottom part of the dialog box), Add

Switch to the Apply To: field and Applies the selected trapezoidal load to the chosen bar.
select the right span. Make sure that
the arrows on the bar are directed to
the right.

By analogy, define the load applied


to the right part of the span. Load
values:
pz1 = - 0.70 (kip/ft)
pz2 = - 0.35 (kip/ft)
relative coordinates
x1 = 0.5
x2 = 1.0

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 209


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Enter the Nature: wind and Defines a wind load with the user-defined name wind from
Name: wind from the right in the the right.
Load Types dialog box then click the
New button

Select the Uniform Load icon on the Opens the Uniform Load dialog box.
Bar tab of the Load Definition dialog

Enter px = - 0.15 (kip/ft), press the Applies the selected load.


Add button. Apply the load to the
right column

Select the Trapezoidal Load icon Opens the Trapezoidal Load dialog box.

Enter the load: px1 = px2 = - 0.15 Defines a trapezoidal load.


(kip/ft) (make sure that pz1 and pz2 Applies the defined load to the central column. Make sure
equal zero) that the arrows on the bar are pointed upwards, close the
Set the relative coordinates: Trapezoidal Load dialog box.
x1 = 0.75 and x2 = 1, Add

Set the Nature: snow and Name: Defines a snow load with the user-defined name snow.
snow in the Load Types dialog box,
confirm it pressing the New button

Select the Uniform Load icon on Opens the Uniform Load dialog box.
the Bar tab of the Load Definition
dialog box

Enter the values pz = - 0.35 (kip/ft) Defines load properties, closes the Uniform Load dialog
and px = 0 (kip/ft). Switch on the box.
Projected Load option in the bottom
part of the dialog box, Add

Select the right span of the structure Applies the defined load to the right bar in the structure.

Click the Nodal Force icon Opens the Nodal Force dialog box

Type Fz = -0.70 (kip) in the Z edit Applies selected load to the appropriate nodes.
field, then click the Add button,
switch to the Apply to field,
afterwards select all the nodes of the
upper chord in the graphic viewer.
The node numbers will appear in the
Apply To field, Apply

16.1.9 Structure Modification

Structure Axis Modification


Selection of the Robot Millennium Selects the initial layout of the Robot Millennium program.
layouts, Structure Model / Start

View / Display Opens the Display dialog box.

On the Others tab - turn on the Chooses the structure attributes for presentation, closes
Structural axis option, Apply, OK the Display dialog box.

210 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Geometry / Axis Definition Opens the Structural Axis dialog box.

Define the required axis. Set Defines an additional structural axis.


Numbering to: A, B, C…and then on
the X tab enter the -20.00 value in
the Position field and insert it into the
Set of Created Axes field by means
of the Insert button, Apply, Close

View / Zoom / Zoom All Displays the initial view of the structure

Select the truss span and the first Selects the left column and truss span opens the
column on the left (column no. 1) and Translation dialog box.
choose the Edit / Edit / Translate
command from the main menu

Enter the following settings in the Defines the translation parameters.


Translation dialog box:
Translation Vector / dX, dZ: (-20, 0)
in the Edit Mode field, switch on the
Copy option; leave the default values
of the remaining settings

Execute, Close Translates selected elements of the structure, closes the


Translation dialog box - see the figure below.
Note: As a result of copying, there appears a new span
with a column to the left of the structure. All
properties of the selected structure elements have
been copied including supports, loads etc.

16.1.10 Additional Load Definition

Selects the Loads layout from the list of available Robot


Millennium layouts.
Structure Model/Loads

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 211


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

LMC on the Nature field - set the Defines a wind load with the user-defined name: wind from
wind option and enter the name: the left.
wind from the left, click New button

Opens the Load Definition dialog box.

Select the Uniform Load icon on the Opens the Uniform Load dialog box.
Bar tab of the Load Definition dialog
box

Enter px = 0.15 (kip/ft) (make sure Applies the selected load and closes the Load Definition
that pz equals zero), press Add. dialog box
Apply loads to the left column, Close

16.1.11 Load Combination Definition

Loads / Combinations Opens the Combination Definition/Modification dialog


box shown in the figure below.

Set all options as shown in the dialog Creates a new combination, closes the Combination
box above and press the OK Definition/Modification dialog box. There appears a new
Combinations dialog box that allows the user to define and
modify the factors of a given combination.

Factor Definition Opens the Combination Factors dialog box.

Set the arrow in the live label, switch Changes the combination factor for the live load, closes the
to the Factor edit field and introduce Combination Factors dialog box.
the new value 1.45, Change, Close

212 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Transfers all combination cases from the left to the right


Press the button located in the panel (see the dialog box below).
Combinations dialog box Note: if the Auto option is set, the factor will assume the
value defined in the Combination Factors dialog box

Apply, Close Saves the combinations with the current parameter values,
closes the Combinations dialog box.

16.2 Structure Analysis

Analysis / Calculations Starts the calculations for the defined structure. Once the
calculations are completed, the message Results (FEM):
available should be displayed at the top of the screen.

16.3 Analysis of Results in the Graphical Form

Selects the Results layout from the list of available Robot


Millennium layouts.
Results/Results

Click the icon in the bottom left Restores the default attributes of the structure view.
corner of the screen

Switch to the Diagrams dialog box Displays deformation of the structure.


and turn on the Deformation option
on the Deformation tab, Apply

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 213


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Position the cursor in the Cases list


box (the upper toolbar) and change
the load cases by means of the
keyboard cursors (up and down
arrows) and watch the results in the
View window. If necessary, re-scale
the drawing by means of the
Normalize button.

Switch off the Deformation option on Stops the display of structure displacements.
the Deformation tab, Apply

In the View viewer: select the right Displays the MY diagram in a new window.
span. Switch on the Labels option in
the Diagram Description field of the
Parameters tab. Then, click the
Open a New Window option at the
bottom of the dialog box. Switch on
display of MY moments on the NTM
tab, Apply

Exit Closes the recently opened window with the MY moment


displayed.

16.4 Analysis of Results in the Table Form

Results / Displacements Opens the table of displacements

While in the Displacements table, Opens the Filtering: Displacements dialog box.
select the Filters option from the
context menu (RMC).

Select the Case option located in the Applies the filtering according to load cases.
list below the All button

Highlight 6: snow in the dialog box Enters the case number into the edit field located above the
with load cases, confirm the black arrows.
selection by pressing the button with

two black arrows

Highlight the 3:purlins case and add Adds the case number into the edit field, closes
it to the selection by clicking on the the Filtering: Displacements dialog box.
button with a black arrow and a

green plus sign . Click the Close


button

214 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Select the Table Columns option Opens the Nodal Value Selection dialog box.
from the context menu.

Switch on the display of RY rotations Displays chosen values in the Displacements table, closes
on the Displacements tab the Nodal Value Selection dialog box.
Go to the General tab and click
Coordinates in the Element Data
Selection field, OK

16.5 Detailed Analysis of Bars

Selects the Detailed Analysis layout from the list of


available Robot Millennium layouts.
Results/Detailed Analysis

Indicate the right span in the View Opens the Detailed Analysis viewer divided into two parts:
window. the top one contains results in the graphical form, while the
Activate the Open a new window bottom one displays the results in the form of a table.
option at the bottom of the Detailed
Analysis dialog box,
Apply

Click the maximum - S max option on Displays the selected quantities (normal stresses) with
the Stresses tab. Activate the display horizontal descriptions.
of horizontal descriptions in the
Parameters tab (click Labels in the
Diagram Description field),
Apply

Go to the Division Points tab. Click Displays results (S max stress values) in the table for 10
the N points along bar length option points evenly distributed over the bar length.
and type 10 in the field beside,
Apply

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 215


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Switch on the characteristic points Enters into the dialog box the coordinates of the points for
option on the same tab, which the maximum and minimum values of S max are
Refresh, Apply obtained (MIN S max x = ... (ft) and MAX S max x = ... (ft),
as well as the beginning and end points of the bar (origin
and end)
Once the Apply button is pressed, the results for the four
characteristic points will be introduced into the results
window

It is also possible to display the Adds the user x = 0.4 row in the dialog box.
results for the user-defined points.
To do so click the relative option on
the Division points tab.
Enter x = 0.4 in the edit field, Add

By analogy, enter the points with the Adds the user-defined rows into the dialog box (see below).
following coordinates: x = 0.5 and x = In the bottom part of the viewer there appear the user-
0.6. defined points with stress values displayed.
Select case 3:purlins in the Case
Selection list, Refresh, Apply

16.6 Dimension Lines

LMC on the box for selection of the Selects the initial layout of the Robot Millennium program.
Robot Millennium program layouts
Structure Model / Start

View / Display Opens the Display dialog box.

216 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Activate the following options: Displays the required quantities, closes the Display dialog
On the Structure tab: box.
Structure,
Node numbers,
Support - symbols,
On the Sections tab:
Section shape
Apply, OK

Tools / Dimension Lines Opens the Dimension Lines dialog box.

Selects the type of a dimension line, which will be defined


as perpendicular to a segment.

Go to the Beginning field, switch to Indicates beginning as well as end points and distance
the graphic viewer and indicate the between the construction and the first dimension line (see
bottom column nodes located on the below). Applies the first dimension line.
A and B structural axes determining
the origin and end of the dimension
line. Switch to the Distance field and
enter {-2}, Apply

Enter the characteristic dimensions


of the structure as shown below,
close the Dimension Lines dialog
box

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 217


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

16.7 Code Parameters for Steel Design

Geometry / Code Parameters / Opens the Member Type dialog box


Steel/Aluminum Member Type

Opens the Member Definition - Parameters dialog box


(see below)

218 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Type Beam 1 in the Member Type Opens the Buckling Diagrams dialog box.
field, switch on the Coefficient option
in the Buckling (Y-axis) Member

Length ly field, then click the


icon

Click the first icon from the left in the Selects the coefficient (1.0) for the Y direction, closes the
first row, Buckling Diagrams dialog box.
OK

Perform the same operation for the Z


direction

Service Opens the Serviceability - Displacement Values dialog


box presented below.

Switch on the options referring to the Determines the additional code-determined parameters
Member deflection options in the defining the values of limit displacements, closes the
Limit Displacements field, Serviceability - Displacement Values dialog box.
OK

Save, Close Saves the above settings, closes the dialog box.
In the Member Type dialog box, there will appear a new
type of element: "Beam1".

Switch to the graphic viewer, select Applies the recently defined member type to the chosen
the right beam and press the Apply beam, closes the Member Type dialog box.
and Close buttons

16.8 Steel Member Verification and Design

LMC on the box for selection of the Selects the layout of the Robot Millennium program, which
Robot Millennium program layouts is used for steel (aluminum) design.
Structure Design/Steel/Aluminum
Design

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 219


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Switch on the Member Verification Opens the Member Selection dialog box.
option in the Calculations dialog box
and click the List relevant to a given
option

Click the All and Close buttons Selects all the bars, closes the opened dialog box.

Perform the same operation for the


load case selection

Select the Ultimate option in the Limit Analysis will be carried out for ULS (internal forces).
State field

Configuration Opens the Configuration dialog box (see the figure below).

Define the following calculation Applies the chosen parameters, closes the Configuration
parameters: dialog box.
Points Number set as 3,
Efficiency Ratio set as 1,
Maximum Slenderness set as 210.
Leave the default values of all the
parameters,
OK

Click the Calculations button Starts calculations. The program will verify automatically the
selected sections and once the calculations are finished,
there appears the dialog box presenting the verified
members (see below).

220 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Click the Calc. Note button Opens the Printout dialog box.

Select the Table printout option, Opens the editor with the detailed data displayed.
OK

Press the Save button.. In the Saves the calculation note, closes the Save As dialog box,
opened Save As dialog box place closes the print preview and theMember Verification dialog
the cursor in the File name field and box.
enter the file name:
calculation_note_1.rtf,
Save, Close, Close

16.9 Group Definition, Verification and Optimization

Go to the Groups tab in the Defines the first group (Columns) consisting of all columns
Definitions dialog box and click the Note: in order to minimize the time consumption during
New button. calculations the user should click the Sections button which
In the Name field enter Columns, opens the Section Selection dialog box and select:
place the cursor in the Member list - the AISC database in the Databases field,
field, switch to the graphic viewer
and select all the columns, - one by one - the sections HP, M, S and W in the
Save Section Families field
Chosen sections are placed in the Selected Sections field;
thus, they will be recognized during the process of
verification.
Close the dialog box by clicking OK.

Click the New button and enter Defines the second group (Beam).
Beam in the Name field. Note: if the family sections for beam are the same there
In the Member List field enter the is no need to repeat the whole operation presented
beam number (i.e. 5), above. Click the Sections button and activate the
Save AISC database. All sections previously selected
are present in the Selected sections field.

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 221


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Click the New button and type Upper Defines the third group (Upper chord).
chord in the Name field. Note: in order to minimize the time consumption during
Switch to the graphic viewer and calculations the user should click the Sections button which
select all the upper chord members, opens the Section Selection dialog box and select:
Save - the AISC database in the Databases field,
- section P in the Section Families field
- deselect the remaining section families HP, M, S and W
Close the dialog box by clicking OK.

Click the New button. Defines the fourth group (Lower chord).
Type Lower chord in the Name field. Note: if the family sections for the lower chord are the same
Switch to the graphic viewer and as for the upper chord proceed similarly as in the
select all the lower chord members, case of Columns and Beam groups.
Save

Click the New button. Defines the fifth group (Posts).


Type Posts in the Name field.
Switch to the graphic viewer and
select all posts in the truss,
Save

Click the New button. Defines the sixth group (Bracings).


Type Bracings in the Name field.
Switch to the graphic viewer and
select all bracings,
Save

Switch to the Calculations dialog Carries out group verification.


box and select the Code Group
Verification option. Define numbers
of groups that will be verified - in this
case 1to6 and all load cases,
Calculations

Indicate the Code Group Design Opens the Optimization Options dialog box.
option in the Calculations dialog box
and type group numbers (no. 1to6).
Switch on the Optimization option
and then press the Options button

From the available options select the If this option is switched on, it causes the section weight to
Weight option, be considered in optimization, i.e. the program will look for
OK the lightest section in the group from among the sections
that meet the code-defined criteria. Closes the
Optimization Options dialog box.

Calculation Runs calculations. The program will carry out the design
calculations with section optimization. From a set of
sections, the program selects the most optimal one with
respect to weight. Clicking the Change All option results in
replacing the sections applied during the design process
with the optimized sections. The optimization should be
carried on until sections, which are to be changed, are the
same.

222 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

16.10 Stress Analysis

Selects the STRESS ANALYSIS - BARS layout from the list


of available Robot Millennium layouts.
Results/Stress Analysis - Bars

In the Stress Analysis dialog box Presents stress values of the chosen section in the dialog
enter the number of a beam to which box, shows stress maps in two longitudinal and one
the stress analysis will apply (in the transversal sections in the three windows located in the left
exercise 4), next set the load case as part of the screen. In the Stress Analysis dialog box there
6: snow and then press the Apply appear new tabs with extreme stresses presented for
button. selected cross sections.

Switch to the Stress Analysis viewer There appears an additional structure bar view (see the
and select the View / 3D View option figure below) with the additional toolbar containing options
from the main menu. that allow the user to move, rotate or zoom the selected
structure bar.

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 223


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

17. Definition of an RC Slab


The example presents definition of an RC slab. Calculation results are presented in the table and map
form. In the example American codes and databases are applied.
Data units: (ft) and (kip).

The following rules apply during structure definition:


• any icon symbol means that the relevant icon is pressed with the left mouse button,
• ( x ) stands for selection of the ‘x’ option in the dialog box or entering the ‘x’ value,
• LMC and RMC - abbreviations for the Left Mouse button Click and the Right Mouse button Click.

To run structure definition start the Robot program (press the appropriate icon or select the command
from the taskbar). The vignette window (described in chapter 2.1 of the manual) will be displayed on

the screen and the icon in the second row (Plate Design) should be selected.

17.1 Structure Definition

Tools / Preferences Opens the Preferences dialog box.

Select options as shown in the figure


below

224 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

OK Closes the Preferences dialog box.

Tools / Job Preferences Opens the Job Preferences dialog box.

Go to the Codes portion of the


opened dialog box and select the
codes as shown in the figures below

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 225


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

OK Closes the Job Preferences dialog box.

Definition of the Contour of the Lower Part of the Slab

Opens the Polyline - Contour dialog box.

Define the settings as follows: Defines the contour, closes the dialog box.
Definition Method: Contour, Note: the points may also be introduced graphically by
In the Geometry field: enter the placing the cursor in the Geometry edit field and
following point coordinates: indicating the required points in the graphical
(0.00,0.00), Add viewer. Clicking the first of the defined points for
(40.00,0.00), Add the second time closes the contour.
(40.00,30,00), Add
(20.00,30.00), Add
(20.00,20.00), Add
(0.00,20.00), Add,
Apply, Close

226 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Definition of the Contour of the External, Arc-Shaped Part of the Slab

Opens the Arc dialog box presented below.

Switch to the Definition Method field Selects the arc definition method.
and select the Begin-End-Middle
option

In the Geometry field enter the Defines the consecutive arc points.
following point coordinates: Note: the points from P1 to P3 may be introduced
Point P1: (20.00,30.00) graphically as well, by indicating the required points
Point P2: (40.00,30.00) in the graphical viewer.
Point P3: (30.00,38.00)

In the Parameters field enter {10} into Defines the arc, closes the Arc dialog box.
the Sides field,
Switch off the Explode option,
Apply, Close

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 227


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Definition of the Slab Properties

Geometry / Panels Opens the Panel dialog box (see the picture below).

Enter the settings as defined below: Defines new panel options.


Contour Type: switch on the Panel
option, Creation With: switch on the
Internal Point option

located to the right of the Opens the New Thickness dialog box.
Thickness field

In the Th = field enter the value 15; Defines the new thickness, closes the dialog box.
in the Label field enter the name
TH15_CONCR;
in the Material field switch on the
CONCR option,
Add, Close

Move the cursor to the Defines the reinforcement type.


Reinforcement field provided in the
Properties field and set the
reinforcement type as Direction X.

Set the cursor in the Internal Point Assigns the recently defined panels to the selected
field. Move the mouse cursor to the contours, closes the Panel dialog box.
graphical viewer and click once on a
point located within the area of the
angular slab, next, click on a point
within the area of the second,
smaller slab,
Add, Close

228 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Definition of Openings within the Contour

Geometry / Objects / Polyline - Opens the Polyline - Contour dialog box.


contour

Define the settings as follows: Defines a rectangular opening, closes the dialog box.
Definition Method: Contour,
In the Geometry field enter the
following:
(4.00,4.00), Add
(10.00,4.00), Add
(10.00,8,00), Add
(4.00,8.00), Add
Apply, Close

Geometry / Objects / Circle Opens the Circle dialog box.

Definition Method set as center- Defines the circle definition method.


radius

In the Geometry field enter: Defines characteristic points applied during the definition
Point P: (30.00,14.00), process.
Radius: (30.00,18.00)

In the Parameters field enter: Defines a circle, closes the dialog box.
Sides: 10
Switch off the Explode option,
Apply, Close

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 229


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Definition of Supports

Opens the Supports dialog box.

From the list of available supports Applies the pinned support to the structure.
select the Pinned support type,
go to the Linear tab, place the cursor
in the Current Selection field.
Switch to the graphical viewer, point
at the slab edges (including the arc)
and click once on the edge.

Analysis / Calculation Model / Starts generation of the calculation model.


Generation

17.2 Definition of Slab Loads

Opens the Load Types dialog box.

Place the cursor on the Nature list Defines a new load case which is automatically defined
and select the dead load nature,New as the self-weight load and set on a first position in the
Loads table.
New Defines a new load case (dead) with the standard name
DL2.

Place the cursor on the Nature list Defines a new load case (live) with the standard name LL1.
and select the live load nature, New

New Defines another live load case with the standard name LL2.
All the defined cases are registered in the List of Defined
Cases field.

230 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Select the second load case (DL2) in Selects the load case.
the List of Defined Cases field.

Loads / Load Definition Opens the Load Definition dialog box.

Go to the Surface tab and click the Open the Uniform Planar Load dialog box.
Uniform Planar Load icon

Enter the load value Closes the Uniform Planar Load dialog box.
2
pz = - 0.10 (kip/ft ) into the new
dialog box (see the picture below),
Add

Set the cursor in the Apply To field Applies DL2 (dead load) to the entire slab surface.
(in the Load Definition dialog box).
Then indicate both panels (click
when they are highlighted) with the
mouse cursor (with the CTRL button
pressed). The panel numbers
become registered in the Apply To
field, Apply

Select the LL1 live load from the list


in the Load Types dialog box

Loads / Load Definition Opens the Load Definition dialog box.

Click the Uniform Planar Load icon Open the Uniform Planar Load dialog box.
located on the Surface tab

Enter the load value Closes the Uniform Planar Load dialog box.
2
pz = - 0.05 (kip/ft ) into the new
dialog box,
Add

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 231


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Switch to the Apply To field and Applies LL1 (live load) to the arc-shape part of the slab.
indicate the arc-shaped panel,
Apply

Indicate the LL2 load case in the


Load Types dialog box

Loads / Load Definition Opens the Load Definition dialog box.

Go to the Surface tab and click the Opens the Linear Load 2p dialog box shown in the picture
Linear Load 2p icon below.

Introduce the following load Closes the Linear Load 2P dialog box.
parameters:
Pz1 = Pz2 = - 0.70 (kip/ft),
Set the cursor at the Coordinates A
line and indicate two corners of the
rectangular opening (located on one
line), Add

Apply Applies LL2 (the linear live load on the edge of the
rectangular opening).

Reopen the Linear Load 2p dialog


box and repeat the operation for the
remaining edges of the opening

Loads / Load Definition Opens the Load Definition dialog box.

Go to the Node tab and click the Opens the Nodal Force dialog box as shown below.
Nodal Force icon

232 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Enter the following parameter: Defines the nodal force value, closes the Nodal Force
Fz = - 0.65 (kip), Add dialog box.

Place the cursor in the Apply To field Selects nodes to which nodal forces will be applied.
of the Load Definition dialog box,
go to the graphical viewer and select
with the window-shaped cursor the
circular opening in the slab

Apply, Close Applies the live load concentrated in the nodes


of the circular opening, closes the Nodal Force dialog box.

Close Closes the Load Types dialog box.

17.3 Meshing Options

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 233


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Opens the Selection dialog box (shown in the picture


below). It is also possible to change meshing parameters
separately for individual contours.

Select the Panel option from the In the selection field the defined panel numbers are
drop-down list provided under the All displayed.
button and choose the User’s
number option located on the Attrib.
tab.

Select panels nos. 1 2 and press the The selected panel numbers appear in the field below the
All button and the panel chosen becomes highlighted.
button, Close Closes the dialog box.

Analysis / Calculation Model / Opens the Advanced Meshing Options dialog box.
Meshing Options
Press the Advanced options button
in the Meshing Options dialog box

Indicate the Delaunay option in the Applies the defined meshing settings to the selected panel
Available Meshing Methods field and (2), closes the dialog box.
Automatic option in the Mesh
Generation field. Type 15 in the
Division1 field, OK

Analysis / Calculation Model / Generates the preview of the finite element mesh on the
Generation screen as shown in the picture below.

234 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

17.4 Definition of Beams Supporting the Slab

Opens the Bars dialog box.

Select the RC Beam option in the Selects the bar type.


Bar Type field

Select the button located to the Opens the New Section dialog box shown below.
right of the Section field

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 235


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Select RC beam in the Section Type Changes the New Section dialog box shape.
field

Enter the following values in the Defines a concrete beam with section dimensions 8x16 and
Basic Dimension field: b = 8 in., B R8x16 name.
h = 16 in.,
In the Label field the program will
generate automatically the name for
a section defined as B R8x16,
Add

Close Closes the New Section dialog box, the recently defined
section is available in Section field of the Bars dialog box.

Set the cursor in the Node Defines two horizontal and one vertical beams
Coordinates field and enter the (see the picture below).
following coordinates in the
Beginning and End fields:
(20,20) - (40,20) Add,
(20,30) - (40,30) Add,
(20,0) - (20,20) Add

17.5 Definition of the Beam Supporting the Arc-Shaped Slab

First Method
Geometry / Bars Opens the Bars dialog box

Open the context menu (available by Opens the Snap Settings dialog box presented
clicking the right-hand mouse button) in the drawing below.
and select: Snap Settings / Snap
Settings

236 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Switch off the following options: Defines the snap setting options which allow the user
- Structural axes to define a beam on the slab arc by drawing it point by point.
- Grid Closes the dialog box.
- Advanced
- Apply without confirmation
Apply, Close

Switch on the Drag option and define Defines bars, closes the dialog box.
beams supporting the arc-shaped
panel point by point, Close

Second Method
Geometry / Objects / Arc Opens the Arc option.

In the Definition Method field select


the Begin - Middle - End option.
Enter 10 into the Sides field provided
in the Parameters portion and switch
off the Explode option.
Place the cursor in the Point P1 field
of the Geometry portion, go to the
graphical viewer and indicate the
beginning, intermediate and end
points of the defined arc.

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 237


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Apply, Close Confirms arc generation, closes the dialog box.

17.6 Definition of Concentrated Forces

Geometry / Nodes Opens the Nodes dialog box.

In the Coordinates field enter: Defines two additional nodes to which nodal forces will be
(24,18) Add applied.
(36,18) Add, Close

Opens the Load Types dialog box.

Set the live option in the Nature field, Defines a new load case of the Live (LL3) nature.
New

Opens the Load Definition dialog box.

Select the Nodal Force load type in Defines the new nodal force, closes the Nodal Force dialog
the Node tab of the dialog box. box.
Define the force Fz = - 1,15kip,
Add

238 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Set the cursor in the Apply To field Applies the recently defined loads to the selected nodes,
and enter the numbers of the two closes the Load Definition dialog box, closes the Load
nodes defined above, Apply, Close, Types dialog box.
Close

17.7 Definition of Load Combinations

Loads / Combinations Opens the Combination Definition/Modification dialog


box (see below).

Switch on the ULS option in the Opens the Combinations dialog box which allows defining
Combination Type field, OK combination parameters.

Transfers all the load cases to the right-hand panel.

Apply, Close Applies the defined load combinations, closes


the Combinations dialog box.

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 239


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

17.8 Structure Analysis

Starts the calculation process.

17.8.1 Results in the Map Form

Results / Maps Opens the Maps dialog box, which is used to display the
chosen maps of internal forces, stresses and displacements
in surface elements.

From the load case list select: 1: DL1 Select the load case for which the results will be presented
in the graphic form.
In the Detailed tab select the Displays maps of the selected quantity.
Displacement u,w option, switch to
the Scale tab and select the Basic
option located in the Color palette
field, Apply

On the Detailed tab in the Maps Ends map display


dialog box switch off the
Displacements u, w option, Apply,
Close

To make the drawing clearer select Opens the Display dialog box.
the View / Display command from
the main menu

240 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

On the Finite elements tab switch off Displays the selected elements, closes the dialog box.
the following options: Numbers and
panels description, Panel interior and
Finite elements, Apply, OK

Results / Panel Cuts Opens the Panel Cuts dialog box.

On the Detailed tab select the The diagram of the chosen quantity on the selected panel
Rotations -R yy option. Next, go to cut will be added to the list of available cuts and presented
the Definition tab and select the 2 on the screen (see the picture bellow).
points option, enter the coordinates Closes the dialog box.
of the cut e.g.:
(0.00, 0.00),
(40.00, 20.00).
Set the layer selection as middle in
the Parameters tab and then set the
following options available on the
Diagrams tab:
filled in the Filling field
normal in the Diagram position field,
Apply, Close

View / Projection / 3d xyz Selects the isometric view.

17.8.2 Results in the Table Form

Results / Plate and Shell Results Opens the FE Results dialog box.

Click the right mouse button and Opens the Result for finite elements dialog box.
select Table Columns option

In the Detailed field activate ( ) the Activates quantities to be applied from the Detailed tab.
following options:
Stresses - s in direction xx,
Shear Forces - Q in direction xx,
Displacement u,w in direction z.

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 241


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

In the Parameters field activate: The table with selected quantities will appear on the screen,
Results - in Element Centers option, closes the dialog box.
Layer Selection - Lower option,
OK

From the load list select the load Selects load cases, closes the table.
case: Simple Cases, close the FE
Results table

17.9 Reinforcement Definition

Geometry / Code Parameters / Plate Opens the Plate\Shell Reinforcement Type dialog box.
and Shell Reinforcement Type

Double-click on the Direction X icon Opens the Reinforcement Parameters ACI 318/99 dialog
box, which allows adding a new reinforcement type.

242 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

On the General tab activate the Defines the name of the reinforcement whose main axis will
Along Y-axis command, enter the be parallel to the Y-axis of the global coordinate system.
name Direction Y in the Name field.
Add, Close

Enter the panel numbers 1 and 2 into Assigns the recently defined reinforcement parameters to
the Panels field, Apply, Close the indicated panels, closes the Plate\Shell Reinforcement
Type dialog box.

17.9.1 Structure Analysis

Analysis / Calculations Starts the calculations.

17.9.2 Reinforcement Calculations

Analysis / Design of RC Structure Opens the layout used for reinforcement calculations.
Elements / RC Plate and Shell The screen will be divided into three parts: graphic viewer,
Design / Required Reinforcement Plate and Shell Reinforcement and Reinforcements
dialog boxes.

In the Method field select the Selects the method based on calculation of the equivalent
equivalent mom. (Wood and Armer) moment; this method is quicker that the analytical one.
option.

Click the button located to the Opens the ULS dialog box.
right of the ULS field

Select all the cases from the list and Selection of this option causes the selected load cases to
appear on the list above the Previous button, closes
press the button, the dialog box.
Close

Opens the Selection dialog box.

In the drop-down list provided under Filters all concrete panels. Removes the current selection
the All button select the Panel and enters numbers of the selected objects.
command.
On the Attrib. tab select the material
option, switch to the selection field
and highlight the CONCR option,

Close Closes the Selection dialog box.

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 243


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Calculate Starts calculation.


Note: It may take a few minutes to complete
the calculations.

17.9.3 Analysis of Reinforcement Results

In the Reinforcement dialog box If this option is selected, the indicated top reinforcement
switch on the option Y[+] located in area in the y direction (perpendicular to the main
the Area A line of Required reinforcement direction assumed) will be presented.
reinforcement
Activate the Maps option located in If this option is selected, the results obtained for
the lower portion of the the surface FE element will be presented in the form of
Reinforcements dialog box maps.

Leave the With normalization option The maps of the selected quantity will be presented
switched on automatically in such a way so that the scale will be
adjusted to the maximum and minimum values of the
selected quantity

Switch on the open new window with This results in display of a new window on the screen in
scale displayed option, which maps of the values selected in the Reinforcements
Apply dialog box are presented.
Note: No map is displayed when reinforcement does not
reach the level of the minimal reinforcement

View / Projection / Zx Selection of the work plane

244 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

17.9.4 Results in the Text Form

Results / Reinforcement / Plate and Opens the Reinforcement Areas table


Shell Reinforcement

RMC while the table is active Opens the context menu.

Select the Table columns Opens the Reinforcement Areas dialog box.

On the Results tab activate: If these options are selected, then in the table
in the Results field - in Elements the reinforcement area will be set at the centers of gravity
Centers option, of planar FE and the top reinforcement spacing in the
In the Minimum reinforcement field - y direction will be displayed.
switch on the Y[+] option located in
the Spacing e line,

On the FE Data tab switch on the Selecting this option results in adding - to the table - the
Section option column in which the section (thickness type) of planar FE
will be selected.

OK Closes the Reinforcement Areas, displays reinforcement


results in the table.

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 245


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

246 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

18. 2D Structure (Mixed RC and Steel Structure)


The example presents a definition of a 2D frame which will be changed to the shell type structure.
Stress analysis as well as RC beam and column analysis were performed.
Data units: (ft) and (kip).
The following rules apply during structure definition:
• any icon symbol means that the relevant icon is pressed with the left mouse button,
• ( x ) stands for selection of the ‘x’ option in the dialog box or entering the ‘x’ value,
• LMC and RMC - abbreviations for the Left Mouse button Click and the Right Mouse button Click.

To run structure definition start the Robot program. The vignette window (described in chapter 2.1 of

the manual) will be displayed on the screen and the icon should be selected.

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 247


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

18.1 Structure Geometry

PERFORMED OPERATION DESCRIPTION

Opens the Structural Axis dialog box.

On the X tab place the cursor in the Introduces axis position into Set of Created Axes.
Position field:
{-4}, Insert
{0}, Insert
{20}, Insert
{40}, Insert
{44}, Insert,
Set Numbering as A, B, C…

Switch to the Z tab and introduce in Defines structural axis, closes the Structural Axis dialog
the Position field: box.
{0}, Insert
{12}, Insert
{21}, Insert
{25}, Insert
{28}, Insert
Set Numbering as 1, 2, 3…
Apply, Close

18.1.1 Section Definition

Opens the Sections dialog box.

Check presence of the following


sections:
- C R12x12,
- B R12x24,
- W 8X28,
- W 10X45

If the above sections are not present Opens the New Section dialog box.
in the list of available sections press
the New section definition icon

On the Standard tab set the section Changes the appearance of the New Section dialog box.
type as RC Column

Set 12 in the b and h field, switch to Defines the C R12x12 section, which appears in the List of
the Label field and introduce column Active sections.
name: C R12x12, Add

Go to the Section type field and Changes the appearance of the New Section dialog box.
select the RC Beam option

248 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Introduce 12 in the b field and 24 in Defines the B R12x24 section, which appears in the List of
the h field, switch to the Label field Active sections.
and enter column name: B R12x24,
Add

Go to the Section type field and Changes the appearance of the New Section dialog box.
select the steel option

Set AISC in the Database field, W in Defines the W 8x28 section, which appears in the List of
the Family field and W 8X28 in the Active sections.
Section field,
Add

As before set AISC in the Database Defines the W 10x45 section, which appears in the List of
field, W in the Family field and W Active sections, closes the New Section and Sections
10X45 in the Section field, dialog boxes.
Add, Close, Close

18.1.2 Bar Definition

Selects the BARS layout from the list of available Robot


Millennium layouts.
Structure Model/Bars

Go to the Bars dialog box and set: Defines reinforced columns.


RC Column (Bar Type field), C
R12x12 (Section field). Place the
cursor in the Node Coordinates /
Beginning field switch to the graphic
viewer and select graphically the
beginning and end of the column by
means of the coordinates of the
intersection point of defined axes:
B1-B2, C1-C2, D1-D2

Set following options for bars: Defines reinforced beams.


RC Beam (Bar Type field), B R12x24 Note: if one wants to transfer a RC beam to the design
(Section field). Go to the Node module, the beam should be defined as a
Coordinates / Beginning field and as sequence of separate elements. If it is defined as a
before indicate the beginning and super-element, it will not be transferred correctly to
end of the beams: A2-B2, B2-C2, the design module.
C2-D2, D2-E2

Set following options: Defines steel column.


Column (Bar Type field), W 8x28
(Section field). Go to the Node
Coordinates / Beginning field and as
before indicate the beginning and
end of the beams: A2-A3, C2-C5,
E2-E3

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 249


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Set following options: Beam (Bar Defines steel beams.


Type field), W 10x45 (Section field).
Go to the Node Coordinates /
Beginning field and as before
indicate the beginning and end of the
beams: A3-C5, E3-C4

18.1.3 Support Definition

Selects the SUPPORTS layout from the list of available


Robot Millennium layouts.
Structure Model/Supports

Switch to the Supports dialog box. Select support type.


Highlight Fixed in the list of supports
Set the cursor in the Current
Selection field.

Go to the graphical viewer View, Applies supports to the three selected nodes.
select the following nodes: 1, 3, and Note: One may also type the relevant supports numbers
5 (bottom nodes of columns located into the Current Selection field.
on the axis 1), Apply

18.1.4 Load Definition

Selects the LOADS layout from the list of available Robot


Millennium layouts.
Structure Model/Loads

Go to the Load Types dialog box, Defines the first load case DL1, which appears in the List of
set Dead in the Nature field, Defined Cases field.
New

Go to the Loads table Robot Millennium generates automatically the loads


originating from the self-weight of the structure and this is
the first load case defined as DL1 (as self-weight in the
table).

Set Dead in the Nature field, Defines the second load case nature (DL2).
New

Set the cursor in the second row of Selects load case (DL2).
the Loads table in the Case column
and select DL2 in the unfolded list
box

Choose the uniform load option in Applies uniform load to selected bars.
the Load Type column. Note: if the bar numbers are not displayed on the structure
Set the cursor in the List column and view one should chose the View / Display
then, in the View column indicate command from the main menu and check out the
bars No. 4to7 (with the CTRL button Bar Numbers option in the Structure tab, and then,
pressed), and introduce the load press the OK button. This will result in displaying
value: Pz = - 0.70 (kip/ft) bar numbers on the structure view.

250 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Set Live in the Nature field, Defines the third load case nature (LL1).
New

Set the cursor in the next record of Selects load case (LL1).
the Loads table (Cases column),
select LL1 in the unfolded list box

Choose the uniform load option in Applies load to selected bars.


the Load Type column, set the cursor
in the List column and then, in the
View column, indicate bars No. 4 and
5, and introduce the load value
Pz = -0.50 (kip/ft)

Set Live in the Nature field, Defines the forth load case nature (LL1).
New

Set the cursor in the next record of Selects load case (LL2).
the Loads table (Cases column),
select LL2 in the unfolded list box

Choose the uniform load option in Applies load to selected bars.


the Load Type column, set the cursor
in the List column and then, in the
View column, indicate bars No. 6 and
7 enter the load value
Pz = - 0.70 (kip/ft)

Selects the START layout from the list of available Robot


Millennium layouts
Structure Model/Start

18.1.5 Definition of Snow/Wind Loads

American code: ANSI/ASCE 7-98


Loads / Special loads / Wind and Opens the Snow and Wind 2D/3D dialog box
Snow 2D/3D

Press the Auto button Automatic generation of the structure envelope for
generation of snow/wind loads (in the Envelope field the
program enters the following node numbers: 1, 2, 7, 9, 10,
12, 11, 8, 6, 5)

Define the following parameters: Defines basic parameters of snow/wind loads


Total depth = (40)
Bay spacing = (20)
active options:
Wind
Snow
inactive options:
Without parapets
With base not on ground
Isolated roofs

Press the Parameters button Opens the additional dialog box (Snow / Wind Loads),
where detailed parameters may be defined

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 251


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Define parameters of the snow/wind Defines parameters of snow/wind loads


load:
the Global parameters tab:
Exposure category: B
Building category: II

the Wind tab: Defines parameters of snow/wind loads


Basic wind speed V: 100 (mph)
Gust effect factor G change to
manual and set the value: 0.83

the Snow tab: Defines parameters for snow/wind loads


Ground snow load Pg: 10 (lb/ft2)
Change exposure category to:
Partially exposed

Generate Pressing the button starts generation of snow and wind


loads with the accepted parameters.

In the Structure frame selection The Structure frame selection viewer allows selection of
viewer containing projection of frames for which wind and snow loads will be generated.
structure frames - select the middle Considering that individual transverse frames are positioned
frame by LMC in the view. in different zones and the load applied to them may vary,
The frame will be highlighted in red. the general number of load cases may be great, therefore,
Accept the selection by pressing the the user is able to choose frames.
OK button.

Close editor showing the calculation The calculation note appears on the screen. It presents the
note parameters of snow/wind load cases

Close the Snow and Wind 2D/3D


dialog box

18.1.6 RC Beam Design

Indicate the beam - bars 4 to 7 with Selects the beams, which will be design.
the CTRL button pressed

Analysis / Design of RC Structure Opens the Load Selection dialog box.


Elements / RC Beam Design

Select the Simple cases option, Displays the BEAM - DEFINITION layout from the list of
OK available layouts.

Being in the Beam-Elevation viewer Opens the Story Parameters dialog box see the picture
choose Analysis / Story Parameters below.

252 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Set the following parameters: Defines story parameters, closes the dialog box.
Reference level: 12 (ft),
Sustained load action for:
5 (months),
OK

Analysis / Calculation Options Opens the Calculation Options dialog box.

Set the following parameters on Defines general calculation options, opens the Advanced
the General tab: Options dialog box.
Deflection < {2},
Cover to: Transversal Reinforcem.,
Advanced

Set the following parameters: Defines the number of calculation, closes the Advanced
Number of calculation points in the Options dialog box.
span: {11},
OK
Leave the default settings of the
remaining parameters.

Save As Opens the Enter the name dialog box.

Type a name of the settings in the Defines the name for the user-defined calculation option
appearing dialog box, set, closes the Enter the name and Calculations options
e.g. Standard_1, dialog boxes.
OK, OK

Analysis / Reinforcement Pattern Opens the Reinforcement Pattern dialog box.

Switch to the General tab and select: Selects the reinforcement generation method.
Reinforcement Segment: Whole
Beam

Go to the Bottom Reinf. tab and Defines maximal number of reinforcement layers, opens
choose: the Span Reinforcement Anchorages dialog box.
Layers/Number/Nmax set {4},
Anchorage Pts

Set the parameter Crossed in the all Defines the way in which span reinforcement reaching
support type, supports. Closes the dialog box.
OK

Go to the Top Reinf. tab and choose: Defines maximal number of reinforcement layers.
Layers/Number/Nmax set {4}

Switch to the Transversal Reinf. tab


and in the Section field highlight the
icons as shown below

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 253


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

On the Struct. Reinf. - leave Defines the structural reinforcement shape.


the default parameters

Go to the Shapes tab and in the Defines hooks length. Opens the Enter the name dialog
Hooks field set: box.
l >= {0.05},
Save As

Enter the name Standard_2, OK Saves parameters under a proper name, closes the dialog
box.
OK Closes the Reinforcement Pattern dialog box.

Analysis / Calculations Opens the Calculation Option Set.

Set the formerly saved settings Starts the calculations.


Standard_2 and Standard_1 in the
Set of Options field.
Set the Reinforcement Layout option
Leave the default values for
the remaining parameters,
Calculations

Structure Model/RC Beams/Beam- Selects the BEAM-RESULTS layout from the list of
results available Robot Millennium layouts. Analyze the results

Results / Calculation Note Opens the Calculation Note dialog box.

Leave all parameters default, OK Displays on the screen calculation note.

Results / Drawings Open the Plotting viewer with drawings displayed on.

To change beam drawings one


should use the buttons
located in the top right corner of the
screen.

File / Save As Opens the Project Component Save dialog box.

Set the Drawings option in Creates the drawing of the generated beam.
the Component Type click icon

Go to the Project Structure field and Defines the drawing name.


name the beam drawing, e.g.
Draw_1, OK

254 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

18.1.7 RC Column Design

Selects the START layout from the list of available Robot


Millennium layouts.
Structure Model/Start

Select the central RC column and Open the Load Selection dialog box.
choose the Analysis / Design of RC
Structure Elements / RC Column
Design command

Select Simple cases option and Opens the RC column design module.
switch on the Automatically run
calculations option,
OK

Structure Model / RC Columns / Selects the COLUMN - DEFINITION layout.


Column - definition

Analysis / Story Parameters Opens the Story Parameters dialog box.

Define following parameters: Defines story parameters.


Reference level: {12},
Sustained load action for: {5},
OK

Analysis / Calculation Options. Opens the Calculation Options dialog box.


On the General tab select options:
Slenderness taken into account
Concrete tab - leave the default
parameters

Switch to the Longitudinal Reinf. tab Selects preferred reinforcement bars.


and from bar list select bars:
# = 3÷10

Transversal Reinf. - leave it Opens the Enter the name dialog box.
unchanged,
Save As

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 255


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Type a name of the settings in the Defines settings name, closes the dialog box.
appearing dialog box, e.g.
Standard_3,
OK, OK

Analysis / Reinforcement Pattern Open the Reinforcement Pattern dialog box.

Switch to the Longitudinal Bars. tab Chooses preferred bar diameter.


and set preferred bars diameters as: Note: to reduce the time of calculations, one should select
#4 a preferred diameter, e.g. #4)

Transversal Bars tab - leave the


default parameters

Go to the Dowel Bars tab and Defines connection type.


activate the Main Bars option in the
Connection to the Upper Column
field

Go to the Shapes tab and select Chooses hooks length. Opens the Enter the name dialog
hook length {0.05}, leave the default box.
values of the remaining parameters,
Save As

Type a name of the settings in the Defines settings name, closes the dialog box.
appearing dialog box, e.g.
Standard_4,
OK, OK

Structure / Buckling Length Opens the Buckling Length dialog box.

If the Non-sway option is active, there will appear the Non-


Click the icon in the Direction Y Sway Structure dialog box.
field.

Defines buckling length coefficient, closes the dialog box.


Select the icon with the 0.80
coefficient (first one in the second
row),
OK

Opens the Non-Sway Structure dialog box.


Click the icon in the Direction Z
field

Defines buckling length coefficient, closes the dialog box.


Select the icon with the 0.80
coefficient (first one in the second
row),
OK

Apply, Close Closes the Buckling Length dialog box.

Analysis / Calculations Opens the Calculation Option Set dialog box.

256 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Set the previously defined settings Starts calculations.


(i.e. Standard_4 and Standard_3) in
the Set of Options field. Leave the
default values for the remaining
parameters, Calculations

Results / Governing Case Opens the Intersections dialog box, which presents a list of
load combinations recognized during the process of
designing the column.

Analyze the parameters of section


efficiency ratio

Structure Model / RC Columns / Opens the COLUMN - RESULTS layout (see the picture
Column - results below). The window presents curves of N-M interaction for
the given load combination.

Results / Calculation Note Opens the Calculation Note dialog box.

OK Generates a document containing all the data concerning


column calculations, closes the Calculation Note dialog
box.

Analyze the generated document

Results / Drawing Open the Plotting viewer with drawings displayed on.

Use the buttons to see the


other drawings of the column

File / Save As Opens the Project Component Save dialog box.

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 257


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Set the Drawings option in the Creates the drawing of the generated column.
Component Type click icon

Go to the Project Structure field and Defines the drawing name.


name the beam drawing, e.g.
Draw_2
OK

18.1.8 Change of the Structure Geometry and Type

Selects the START layout from the list of available Robot


Millennium layouts.
Structure Model/Start
Geometry / Structure Type Opens the window presented on the drawing below.

Select the Shell Design (the third one Changes structure type to shell.
from the left in the second row)

Opens the Structural Axis dialog box.

258 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

On the Y tab place the cursor in the Introduces axis position into Set of Created Axes, closes
Numbering selection list and select the Structural Axis dialog box.
the Define option, set the axis name
for Level 1.
Introduce the following values to the
Position field:
{0}, Insert
{20}, Insert
{40}, Insert, Apply, Close

Ctrl + A Selects all bars which will be highlighted into the red color.

Edit / Edit / Translate Opens the Translation dialog box (see below).

In the dX, dY, dZ edit field type the Define the translation vector.
translation vector: (0, 20, 0) Note: One may define translation vector graphically by
clicking on the beginning and end of the translation
vector.
Enter the value 2 in the Number of Copies selected elements.
repetitions field. Leave the default
values for the remaining parameters,
Execute, Close

View / Projection / 3d xyz Displays a 3d view of the structure (see the picture below).

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 259


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Selects the BARS layout from the list of available Robot


Millennium layouts.
Structure Model/Bars

If the W 8X15 section is not present Opens the New Section dialog box.
in the available section list, one
should press the button located
to the right side of the Section field

On the Standard tab set the section Changes the appearance of the New Section dialog box.
type as Steel

Set AISC in the Database field, W in Defines the W 8x15 section, which appears in the List of
the Family field and W 8X15 in the Active sections.
Section field, Add, Close

To define bar element sets: Defines beams connecting frame corners.


Beam in the Bar Type field,
W 8x15 in the Section field. Then
move the cursor to the graphic
viewer, click with the left mouse key
on the point depicting the beginning
and end point of the bar element.
These points may be define as the
coordinates of the intersection points
of following structure axis:
(E, Level 1, 3) and (E, Level 2, 3),
(E, Level 2, 3) and (E, Level 3, 3),
(C, Level 1, 5) and (C, Level 2, 5),
(C, Level 2, 5) and (C, Level 3, 5),
(A, Level 1, 3) and (A, Level 2, 3),
(A, Level 2, 3) and (A, Level 3, 3)

260 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

18.1.9 Slab Definition

View / Work in 3D / Global Work Opens the Work Plane dialog box (see the picture below).
Plane

Move the cursor to the graphic The coordinates in the Work Plane dialog box will change
viewer and select the left end point of automatically to the selected one e.g. (-4.00,0.00,12.00).
the concrete beam

In the Fixed field switch on the Z Defines new work plane, closes the dialog box.
option, Apply

View / Projection / Xy Once the option is selected the structure is set on the XY
plane at the recently defined Z coordinate (e.g. Z = 12); only
structure components from this plane are displayed.

Geometry / Objects / Polyline- Opens the Polyline-Contour dialog box.


contour

In the Definition Method edit field Defines the contour, closes the dialog box.
select the Contour option. Place the Note: Closing the contour is effectuated by clicking the first
cursor in the Geometry field indicate of the defined points for the second time.
the required points of the contour in
the graphic viewer (the contour may
be also defined by typing appropriate
coordinates in the Geometry field).
A, Level 1 Add,
E, Level 1 Add,
E, Level 3 Add,
A, Level 3 Add,
A, Level 1 Add

Geometry / Panels Opens the Panel dialog box.

Define settings as defined below: Defines panel properties.


Contour Type: Panel option,
Creation With: Internal Point option,
Reinforcement type: Direction X
Thickness: TH12_CON.

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 261


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Place the cursor in the Internal Point Applies chosen panel properties to the selected contour in
field. Switch to the graphical viewer the construction, closes the dialog box shown on the picture
and indicate once a point within the below.
boundaries of the rectangular slab,
Close

18.1.10 Offset Definition

View / Display Opens the Display dialog box.

Switch on following options: On the structure drawing, which appears on the screen one
Finite Elements tab: Thickness can see that axis of the RC beams and RC slab are on the
option, same level. Robot Millennium allows one for defining of
Sections tab: Section - shape option offsets within the structure.
Apply, OK

262 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Geometry / Additional Attributes / Opens the Offsets dialog box.


Offsets

Opens the dialog box for defining new offset will be open
(see the picture below).

In the Label field enter the name Applies recently defined offset in the active list of offsets,
Offset_1 for new offset. Then in the closes the dialog box.
UZ field introduce the offset value (in
the exercise the offset value is equal
-18 in as it is half of RC slab height
plus half of RC beams height) at the
beginning and at the end of the bar in
the Z-axis direction. In the
Coordinate System field activate the
Global option,
Add, Close

Place the cursor in the Current Applies offset to the selected elements, closes the dialog
Selection field and type the numbers box. Result of this operation presents picture below.
of bars (e.g. all concrete beams), to
which offsets will be attributed
Finish the operation by pressing
Apply, Close

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 263


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

18.1.11 Front Wall Definition

View / Work in 3D / Global Work Opens the Work Plane dialog box (see the picture below).
Plane

Move the cursor to the graphic The coordinates in the Work Plane dialog box will change
viewer and select the left end point of automatically to the selected one e.g. (40.00,0.00,0.00).
the concrete beam

In the Fixed field switch on the X Defines new work plane, closes the dialog box.
option, Apply

View / Projection / Yz Once this option is selected the structure is set on the YZ
plane at the recently defined X - coordinate value (e.g.
Z = 40) and only structure components from this plane will
be displayed.

Geometry / Objects / Polyline- Opens the Polyline-Contour dialog box


contour

In the Definition Method edit field Defines the contour see the picture below, closes
select the Contour option. Place the the Polyline - Contour dialog box.
cursor in the Geometry field and
introduce coordinates of the points
defining the appropriate contour:
1 (40.0, 0.0, 0.0)
2 (40.0, 6.0, 0.0)
3 (40.0, 6.0, 8.0)
4 (40.0, 12.0, 8.0)
5 (40.0, 12.0, 0.0)
6 (40.0, 28.0, 0.0)
7 (40.0, 28.0, 8.0)
8 (40.0, 34.0, 8.0)
9 (40.0, 34.0, 0.0)
10 (40.0, 40.0, 0.0)
11 (40.0, 40.0, 12.0)
12 (40.0, 0.0, 12.0),
Apply, Close

264 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Geometry / Panels Opens the Panel dialog box.

Click the button located to the Opens the New Thickness dialog box.
right of the Thickness field

In the Th field type 25, which is Confirm new thickness settings, closes the New Thickness
a new value for panel thickness. dialog box.
Then in the Label field enter new
name TH25_CONCR, Add, Close

Set the folowing parameters: Applies chosen panel properties to the selected contour in
Reinforcement type: Dir_Z the structure.
Thickness: TH25_CONCR in the If the Dir_Z reinforcement type is not available in the
Panel dialog box and then, set the reinforcement type list, press the button located to the
cursor in the Internal Point field. right of the Reinforcement list
Move the cursor to the graphical
viewer and indicate once the point
within the boundaries of the recently
defined contour.

On the General tab define settings Defines new reinforcement parameters, closes the dialog
as presented on the picture below, box shown on the picture below.
Add, Close

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 265


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

18.1.12 Definition of Supports on Wall Edges

Geometry / Supports Opens the Supports dialog box.

From the list of active supports Applies supports on the wall.


check out the fixed support type
(recently selected support type will
be highlighted). Then in the Current
Selection field activate the Line
option. Set the cursor in the graphic
viewer and click at the appropriate
edge when it is highlighted

18.1.13 Definition of Additional Loads to Be Applied to the Slab

Loads / Load Types Opens the Load Types dialog box.

Select the live nature in the Nature It results in appearance a new load case (LL3) in the list of
field, New defined cases.

Select the recently define load case Opens the Load Definition dialog box.
from the available load list. Press the
icon

On the Surface tab click the Uniform Opens the Uniform Planar Load dialog box.

Planar Load icon and set the


parameter as presented on the
picture below

266 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Confirm the settings pressing the Closes the Uniform Planar Load dialog box.
Add button

In the Apply To field enter Applies planar load to structure elements, closes the Load
the number defining the slab to which Definition dialog box.
the load will be applied,
Apply, Close

18.1.14 Definition of Combinations

Loads / Combinations Opens the Combination Definition / Modification dialog


box.

Leave all parameters default and Opens the Combinations dialog box.
press the OK button

Select the DL1 load case from the Defines load cases for the combination.
Case List, press the button
Repeat the above operations for the
live load cases and one of the wind
cases.

Apply, Close Closes the dialog box.

18.1.15 Definition of Meshing Options

Tools / Job Preferences / Meshing Opens the Meshing Options dialog box.
Options / Modification

In the Mesh Generation field - with Defines meshing options, closes the dialog box.
the Delaunay method switched on in
the Available Meshing Methods field
- activate Automatic option and enter
10 in the Division 1 field. Other
parameters leave as default, OK

OK Closes the Job Preferences dialog box.

Analysis / Calculation Model / If this option is selected, Robot Millennium generates


Generation the calculation model of a structure (finite elements
Note: meshing parameters have been change in the same
way in both panels.

To change meshing parameters for Opens the Meshing Options dialog box.
one panel (e.g. vertical) chose
vertical panel and then select from
the menu: Analysis / Calculation
Model / Meshing Options

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 267


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

In the Available Meshing Methods Defines meshing parameters for vertical panel, closes
select the Delaunay method, switch the Meshing Options dialog box.
to the Mesh Generation field and
select the Automatic option. In the
Division 1 field enter 15, OK

Analysis / Calculation Model / Local Generates the calculation model.


Mesh Generation

18.2 Structure Analysis

Starts the calculations.

18.3 Analysis of Results

Results / Maps Opens the Maps dialog box.

Activate the open new window with Displays the viewer presented on the picture below.
scale displayed option located in the
lower portion of the dialog box.
Select from the list of loads LL3 load
case and on the Detailed tab chose
the Displacement - u, w in the
direction z option,
Apply

268 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Results / Diagrams for bars Opens the Diagrams dialog box.

In the NTM tab turn on the FZ Force The diagram of selected force appears in the graphic viewer
option, if not, press the Normalize button. Pressing this button
Apply results in presenting diagrams of a selected quantity in such
a way that the scale will be adjusted to the maximum and
minimum value of the indicated quantity.

Switch off the FZ Force option and If this options are selected the structure deformed under
go to the Deformation tab. Activate loads will be displayed in a new window on the screen as
the Deformation command then set shown below.
in motion the Open a new window
option located in the lower part of the
dialog box

Results / Plate and Shell Results Opens the FE Results table.

Select from the load cases list DL1 Opens the Results for Finite Elements dialog box.
load case and then open the context
menu by clicking the right mouse
button. Select the Table columns
option

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 269


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

In the Detailed tab switch on options: Selecting these options results in adding to the table,
Membrane Forces - N in the direction another columns representing membrane forces, shear
xx, Shear Forces - Q in the direction forces and displacements at the structure nodes for the
yy, Displacements u,w in direction z upper FE layer. Closes the Results for Finite Elements
On the Parameters tab select dialog box.
following options:
panel/node in the Results field
upper in the Layer Selection field,
OK

18.4 Stress Analysis for All Structure Bars

Results / Stress Analysis / Stress The screen displays a window presenting the structure view,
Analysis - Structure result table in the lower part and the dialog box Stress
Analysis - Structure governing stress analysis.

Select the 1: DL1 load case from the Selects load case for stress analysis.
set of available load cases

In the Diagrams tab chose the Mises The Robot Millennium performs calculations and presents
Max option, switch to the parameters the stress values on the structure bars, whereas the tabular
tab and select the Filled option result window (table) displays the values of the appropriate
located in the Filling field, stresses (see the picture below).
Apply

270 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Go to the Maps - Deformation tab in If this option is switched on, then after generating a 3D view
the Stress Analysis - Structure presenting stress maps for structure bars, stress maps will
dialog box and switch on the be presented on a deformed structure.
Deformation option

Being in the Structure Analysis - Selecting this command allows presenting a structure
structure results table select from the together with section shapes and accurate detailed stress
menu - which changes its shape - maps on these sections (the example of the structure with
View / Dynamic View 3D command the presented stresses is shown in the figure below).

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 271


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

19. 3D Steel Structure (Modal and Time History Analyses)


The example presents the definition of a 3D steel structure (simple workshop) as presented in the
figure below. Definitions and combinations of loads as well as modal and time history analyses are
included in the example.
Data units: (ft) and (kip). Combinations will be generated according to LRFD.

The following rules apply during structure definition:


• any icon symbol means that the relevant icon is pressed with the left mouse button,
• ( x ) stands for selection of the ‘x’ option in the dialog box or entering the ‘x’ value,
• LMC and RMC - abbreviations for the Left Mouse button Click and the Right Mouse button Click.

To run structure definition start the Robot program (press the appropriate icon or select the command
from the taskbar). The vignette window (described in chapter 2.1 of the manual) will be displayed on

the screen and the icon in the first row (Frame 3D Design) should be selected.

272 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

19.1 Structure Geometry

PERFORMED OPERATION DESCRIPTION

Geometry / Axis Definition Opens the Structural Axis dialog box.

On the X tab set numbering as Defines X coordinates of the vertical axes (in the YZ plane).
A, B, C, place the cursor in the
Position field and enter the following
numbers:
{-22} Insert,
{-18} Insert,
{0} Insert,
{18} Insert,
{22} Insert

On the Y tab set numbering as Defines Y coordinates of the horizontal axes (in the XZ
A, B, C, place the cursor in the plane).
Position field and enter the following
numbers:
{0} Insert,
{20} Insert,
{40} Insert,
{60} Insert,
{80} Insert

On the Z tab set numbering as Defines Z coordinates of the horizontal axes (in the XY
1, 2, 3, place the cursor in the plane). Generates the structural axes, closes the Structural
Position field and enter the following Axis dialog box.
numbers:
{0} Insert,
{12} Insert,
{18} Insert,
{22} Insert,
Apply, Close

View / Projection / ZX Displays ZX plane of the structure.

Selects the BARS layout from the list of available Robot


Millennium layouts.
Structure Model/Bars

Select the following options in the Selects bar properties.


Bars dialog box: Note: If the Section list box does not contain the W 8X28
Bar Type: Column section, the user should click the button to open
Section: W 8X28 the New Section dialog box. In the Standard tab, the
user should select:
− Database: AISC
− Family: W
− Section: W 8X28, Add, Close

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 273


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Go to the graphical viewer (View) Defines the columns.


and define the following bars using
the structural axes
- A1 - A3
- E1 - E3

Switch to the Bars dialog box and Selects bar properties.


select: Note: if the Section list box does not contain the W 10X45
Bar Type: Beam section, the user should repeat the operation as in the
Section: W 10X45 case of the W 8x28 section.

Go to the graphical viewer and define Defines the spandrel beams.


spandrel beams
- A3 - C4
- E3 - C4

Edit / Divide Opens the he Division dialog box.

In the Division field indicate the - into Divides the spandrel beam into 3 parts. Closes the Division
n parts option, and type 3 in the dialog box.
Number of Segments field.
Activate the Generate nodes without
bar/edge division option.
Go to the graphical viewer and
perform the operation of division by
clicking on the formerly created
spandrel beams,
Close

Switch to the Bars dialog box and Selects bar properties.


select:
Bar Type: Simple bar
Section: W 10X45

Switch to the graphical viewer and Defines cantilevers.


define bars using the structural axes
- A2 - B2
- E2 - D2

Geometry / Additional Attributes / Opens the Brackets dialog box.


Brackets

Opens the New Bracket dialog box.

Type Bracket_1 in the Name field Defines a new bracket, closes the New Bracket dialog box.
and define the following settings:
Bracket Type - Plates,
Parameters:
Length = 0.20 x Bar Length.
Leave the default values of the
remaining parameters,
Add, Close

274 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Indicate the new bracket in the Assigns the new bracket to the chosen members, closes
Brackets dialog box, type the the Bracket dialog box.
spandrel beam numbers in the Bars
edit field or, after clicking in the field,
indicate the elements in the graphical
viewer (with the CTRL button
pressed),
Apply, Close

Selects the SUPORTS layout from the list of available


Robot Millennium layouts.
Structure Model/Supports

Highlight the Pinned option in Defines a support.


the Supports dialog box. Click the
mouse cursor in the Current
Selection field (the cursor will start to
blink). Then, type there the numbers
of the bottom column nodes (node
no. 1 and 3) or select them in the
graphical viewer, Apply

Selects the initial layout from the list of available Robot


Millennium layouts.
Structure Model/Start

Edit / Select All (CTRL+A) Selects the entire structure.

View / Work in 3D / 3Dxyz Displays the 3D view.

Edit / Edit / Translate Opens the Translation dialog box.

In the Translation Vector field type: Translates structure elements, closes the dialog box.
0 20 0 (or 0, 20, 0);
In the Number of Repetitions field
type {4},
Execute, Close

View / Work in 3D / Global Work Opens the Work Plane dialog box.
Plane

Click the right corner of the first Defines the work plane for structure definition/modification.
frame (or type the coordinates:
22, 0, 18 in the edit field) which will
result in selection of the work plane,
Apply, Close

Displays YZ plane of the structure.


Select the View icon from the
top toolbar, which opens a next
toolbar. Click the Projection YZ
icon

Opens the Bars dialog box

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 275


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Set the following parameters: Defines elements connecting the right frame corners.
Bar Type: Beam,
Section: W 8X15.
Connect the frame corners defining
the following bars:
- A3 - B3
- B3 - C3
- C3 - D3
- D3 - E3

View / Work in 3D / Global Work Opens the Work Plane dialog box.
Plane

Click the left corner of the first frame Defines the work plane.
(or type the coordinates –22, 0, 18 in
the edit field) which results in
selecting the work plane,
Apply

By analogy, draw bars connecting left


frame corners

Go to 3D view by pressing the 3D Displays 3D view of the structure.


Projection XYZ icon in the View
toolbar

Go to the Work Plane dialog box Defines the work plane.


and select the work plane
corresponding to the frame top by
clicking the top of the first frame or
entering its coordinates (0, 0, 22),
Apply

Click the button in the top part of Closes the Work Plane dialog box.
the Work Plane dialog box

View / Projection / YZ Displays YZ plane of the structure.


Note: as a result of the work plane definition, the structure
view disappears.

Switch to the Bars dialog box and Defines elements connecting tops of frame corners.
set the following parameters:
Bar Type: Beam,
Section: W 8X15.
Connect the frame corners defining
the following bars:
- A4 - B4
- B4 - C4
- C4 - D4
- D4 - E4

Selects the BARS layout from the list of available Robot


Millennium layouts.
Structure Model/Bars

View / Work in 3D / Local System Opens the Local System Definition dialog box.
Definition by 3 Points

276 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

In the Point Definition field define Defines a new coordinate system.


the following point coordinates:
P1: (22, 0, 18),
P2: (22, 20, 18),
P3: (0, 0, 22),
Apply

Switch to the Bars dialog box and Defines purlins. Closes the additional view.
set the following parameters: Tip: when drawing the purlins, the user may take advantage
Bar Type: Beam, of the formerly defined division of spandrel beams, i.e. from
Section: W 6X9. the additional nodes on spandrel beams. If the nodes are
Draw purlins connecting successive not visible, the user should switch on the Node numbers
spandrel beams, option on the Structure tab in the Display dialog box (it may
Exit be activated by the View / Display command) and close the
dialog box.

In the Point Definition field define the Defines a new coordinate system, closes the dialog box.
following point coordinates:
P1: (-22, 0, 18),
P2: (-22, 20, 18),
P3: (0, 0, 22),
Apply, Close

Switch to the Bars dialog box Defines purlins. Closes the additional view.
and set the following parameters:
Bar Type: Beam,
Section: W 6X9.
Draw purlins connecting successive
spandrel beams,
Exit

Edit / Correct Opens the Structure Correction dialog box (see the picture
below).

In the opened dialog box switch on Eliminates possible errors, closes the dialog box.
the following options:
Entire Structure,
Bar Intersections,
Geometrical Center,
Apply, Close

View / Work in 3D / Global Work Opens the Work Plane dialog box.
Plane

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 277


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Switch to the graphic viewer and Defines the work plane for bracing definition.
select a point belonging to the right
wall of the structure, e.g. the corner
(22, 0, 18),
Apply

Click the button in the top part of Closes the Work Plane dialog box.
the Work Plane dialog box

View / Projection / Yz Displays the structure view in the YZ plane.

Switch to the Bars dialog box and Defines bracings in the right part of the workshop.
set the following parameters:
Bar Type: Simple Bar,
Section: C 4x5.4.
Define the following bars:
- A1 - B3
- B1 - A3
- D1 - E3
- E1 - D3

Selects the initial layout from the list of available Robot


Millennium layouts.
Structure Model/Start

View / Projection / 3D xyz Displays a 3D structure view.

Select C 4x5.4 section and confirm Selects all C 4x5.4 sections in the structure.

the operation by pressing

Edit / Edit / Translate Opens the Translation dialog box.

Define the following Translation Create bracings for the left wall, closes the Translation
Vector: (-44, 0, 0), dialog box.
Execute, Close

Geometry / Releases Opens the Releases dialog box.

Highlight the Pinned - Pinned label

Switch to the graphic viewer and Opens the Selection dialog box.

click the icon

Select C 4x5.4 section and confirm Selects all C 4x5.4 sections in the structure.

the operation by pressing .

Switch to the Current Selection field Assigns releases to the selected members, closes the
in the Releases dialog box, dialog box.
Apply, Close

Geometry / Additional Attributes / Opens the Advanced Properties dialog box.


Advanced Bar Properties

278 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Click the Tension Bars option, Assigns advanced properties to the members chosen,
Switch off the Truss bars - only axial closes the dialog box.
forces act option. Enter the numbers
of all the bracings into the Bar Lists
edit field,
Apply, Close

19.2 Load Definition

Selects the LOADS layout from the list of available Robot


Millennium layouts.
Structure Model/Loads

Switch to the Load Types dialog box Defines new load case (dead) with standard name DL1.
and select the nature: Dead,
New

Select the nature: dead, Defines new load case nature (dead) with standard name
New DL2.

Opens the Load Definition dialog box.


Select the Load Definition icon
from the side toolbar

Go to the Bar tab in the dialog box. Opens the Uniform Load dialog box.

Select the Uniform Load

Define the load Defines the load value and direction, closes the Uniform
pz = - 0.25 (kip/ft), Load dialog box.
Add

Switch to the Apply To edit field and Applies the dead load originating from the roof cladding,
indicate, in the graphical viewer, all closes the Load Definition dialog box.
the spandrel beams,
Apply, Close

Select the nature: wind, Defines a new load case (wind) with the standard name
New WIND1.

Opens the Load Definition dialog box.


Select the Load Definition icon
from the side toolbar

Go to the Bar tab in the dialog box. Opens the Uniform Load dialog box.

Select the Uniform Load

Define the load Defines the load value and direction, closes the Uniform
px = 0.25 (kip/ft), Load dialog box.
The remaining loads, i.e. py and pz
should be zeroed out,
Add

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 279


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Switch to the Apply To edit field and Applies the wind load to the left column of the structure.
indicate columns in the left part of
the structure,
Apply

Reenter the Uniform Load dialog Defines the load value and direction, closes the Uniform
box, enter the load pz = - 0.10 Load dialog box.
(kip/ft), select Local Coordinate
System,
Add

Switch to the Apply To edit field and Applies the load to the spandrel beams in the left part of the
indicate the spandrel beams structure.
belonging to the left part of the roof,
Apply, Close

By analogy create a new load type. Defines a new load case nature (wind) with the standard
Select nature: wind, name WIND2.
New

Opens the Load Definition dialog box.


Select Load Definition icon from
the right-hand toolbar

Go to the Bar tab in the dialog box. Opens the Uniform Load dialog box.

Select the Uniform Load

Define the load Defines the load value and direction, closes the Uniform
px = - 0.25 (kip/ft), Load dialog box.
Global Coordinate System
The remaining loads, i.e. py and pz
should be assigned zero values,
Add

Switch to the Apply To edit field and Applies the wind load to the column on the right.
indicate columns in the right-hand
part of the workshop hall,
Apply

Reenter the Uniform Load dialog Defines the load value and direction, closes the Uniform
box, enter the load pz = - 0.10 Load dialog box.
(kip/ft), select Local Coordinate
System,
Add

Switch to the Apply To edit field and Applies the load to the spandrel beams of the right-hand
indicate the spandrel beams of the part of the roof.
right-hand part of the roof,
Apply, Close

Select the nature: snow, Defines a new load case nature (snow) with the standard
New name SN1.

Opens the Load Definition dialog box.


Select the Load Definition icon
from the side toolbar

280 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Go to the Bar tab in the dialog box. Opens the Uniform Load dialog box.

Select the Uniform Load

Define the load Defines the value and direction of the load which will refer
pz = - 0.25 (kip/ft), set Coordinate to the bar length projected on the plane that corresponds to
System as Global, switch on the the direction of force operation. Closes the Uniform Load
Projected load option, dialog box.
Add

Switch to the Apply To edit field and Applies the snow load, closes the Load Definition dialog
indicate, in the graphical viewer, all box.
the spandrel beams,
Apply, Close

Select the nature: live, Defines a new load case (live) with the standard name LL1.
New

Opens the Load Definition dialog box.


Select the Load Definition icon
from the side toolbar

Go to the Bar tab in the dialog box. Opens the Bar Force dialog box.

Select the Bar Force

Enter the load: Defines the live load, closes the Bar Force dialog box.
FZ = - 2.50 (kip),
Add

Place the cursor in the Apply To edit Selects element to which the live load will be applied, closes
field, switch to the graphic viewer the Load Definition dialog box.
and indicate the left cantilever of the
first frame,
Apply

Then reenter the Bar Force dialog Defines the live load, closes the Bar Force dialog box.
box and apply the load:
FZ = - 0.50 (kip),
Add

Place the cursor in the Apply To edit Applies the live load (LL1) to the cantilever of the first frame.
field, switch to the graphic viewer
and indicate the right cantilever the
same frame,
Apply

Select the nature: live, Defines a new load case nature (live) and the standard
New name LL2.

Opens the Load Definition dialog box.


Select the Load Definition icon
from the side toolbar

Go to the Bar tab in the dialog box. Opens the Bar Force dialog box.

Select the Bar Force

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 281


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Enter the load: Defines the live load, closes the Bar Force dialog box.
FZ = - 2.50 (kip),
Add

Place the cursor in the Apply To edit Selects the element to which the live load will be applied,
field, switch to the graphic viewer closes the Load Definition dialog box.
and indicate the left cantilever of the
second frame,
Apply

Then reenter the Bar Force dialog Defines the live load, closes the Bar Force dialog box.
box and apply the load:
FZ = - 0.50 (kip),
Add

Place the cursor in the Apply To edit Applies the live load (LL2) to the cantilever of the first frame.
field, switch to the graphic viewer
and indicate the right cantilever the
same frame,
Apply

Repeat the same operation for the


remaining frames (LL3, LL4 and
LL5).

19.3 Load Combination Definition

Tools / Job Preference Opens the Job Preferences dialog box presented in
the picture below.

Select the Codes / Actions option Select code for combinations, closes the dialog box.
and set LRFD in the Code
Combinations list box, OK

Loads / Code Combinations Opens the Load Case Code Combination dialog box.

282 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Activate the calculations - with the


options turned on as shown in the
drawing below.

Go to the third tab: Groups. Creates a second group of cases.


Select the Nature: live in the list box,
highlight the LL2 case and transfer it
to the right-hand panel by means of
the button.
Press Create a group from cases

Return to the Group Cases: 1 and Creates the remaining groups of cases.
create the third load group out of the
LL3 load. Repeat the operation until
there remains only the LL1 load in
the Group Cases: 1.

Go to the next tab: Relations. Creates five independently operating cases for all the five
Select the Nature: live from the list live loads.
box, chose the or(excl) operator.
Highlight a given load case and
move it to the right panel (see the
picture below)

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 283


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Go to the Simplified Combinations Allows the user to generate extreme combinations with
tab and select the MY and MZ particular values considered.
moments and Reactions, switch on
the Simplified Combinations option in
the bottom part of the dialog box

Switch to the Selection. Allows the user to generate simplified combinations for the
Select all bars and all nodes, selected bars or nodes. Closes the Load Case Code
Close Combination dialog box.

19.4 Structure Analysis

Tools / Job preferences Opens the Job Preferences dialog box.

Highlight the Structure Analysis Select the DSC algorithm (discontinuity) which will be used
option in the tree provided in during structure calculations.
the dialog box and select the
DSC algorithm option,
OK

Starts the calculation.

19.5 Analysis of Results

Selects the RESULTS layout from the list of available


Robot Millennium layouts.
Results/Results

Indicate the FX internal force in the Displays the diagram of the FX internal forces in the graphic
Diagrams dialog box, viewer.
Apply

View the results in the structure view.


By means of the Select Cases (top of

the screen - icon) list box, view


the results for the remaining loads

Screen-capture the results for the Opens the Screen Capture dialog box.
most interesting load case: when in
the structure view, select the Screen
Capture command from the context
menu (RMC)

Define a name of the screen capture, Defines the screen capture name, closes the dialog box.
OK

Results / Forces Opens the table Forces - cases: with the results displayed.
As before, view the results for each
load case separately by means of the
Select Cases list box

284 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Select the snow load case and then, Opens the Filtering: Forces dialog box.
chose the Filters option from the
context menu.

Select the section: C 4x5.4, Filters the bracings, closes the dialog box.
Close

CTRL+ALT+Q Opens the Screen Capture Label dialog box.

Define a screen capture titled Defines the screen capture named Bracings, closes the
"Bracings", OK dialog box.

Close the results table

19.6 Modal Analysis

Analysis / Analysis Types Opens the Analysis Type dialog box.

Press the New button located in the Opens the New Case Definition dialog box
lower part of the dialog box

Set the name of a new case as The Modal Analysis Parameters dialog box, presented in
Modal_1 the drawing below appears on the screen.

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 285


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Activate the following options: Confirms the settings, closes the dialog boxes.
- Analysis Mode: Modal option
- Method: Lanczos Algorithm
- Mass Matrix: Lumped with
Rotations.
Parameters:
- Numbers of Modes: 10
- Tolerance: 0.0001
- Number of Iterations: 40
- Damping: 0.05
- Participation Masses: Inactive
OK, Close

Starts calculations.

19.6.1 Analysis of Vibration Eigenmodes

From the list of loads select the load Selects the load case and mode.
case: Modal_1. Then from the list of
modes select the mode: Mode 3

Results / Diagrams for Bars Opens the Diagrams dialog box.

On the Deformation tab switch on the Presents the diagrams of the selected vibration modes
Deformation option. calculated during structure analysis.
In the Diagrams Scale for 1(in) enter Note: if the diagram will not appear in the graphic viewer,
the number of structure deformation push the Normalize button. Pressing this button
units for unit length e.g. 1, results in presenting diagrams of a selected quantity
Apply in such a way that the scale will be adjusted to the
maximum and minimum value of the indicated
quantity.

Switch to the Number of frames list Prepares the animation of the selected value based on the
box and enter 15, then switch to the parameters assigned and begins the animation. During the
Number of frames / second and presentation, a toolbar presented on the picture below
introduce 10, appears on the screen with options used to stop, pause,
Start replay etc.

Results / Advanced / Modal Analysis Opens the Dynamic Analysis Results table.

While the cursor is located within the Opens the Dynamic analysis value selection dialog box.
table open the context menu by
means of RMC and select the Table
Columns option

On the Eigenvectors tab activate the Additional columns appear in the table, closes the dialog
following options in the Components box.
field: UX, RZ,
OK

286 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Place the cursor within the table and Opens the Screen Capture Label dialog box presented
press the right mouse button to open below.
the context menu and select the
Screen Capture option.

OK Defines screen capture.

File / Printout Composition Opens the Printout Composition - Wizard dialog box.

Go to the Screen Capture tab, Adds defined screen captures to the right panel.
highlight the screen capture and click
the All button

Displays the preview of the selected screen capture.

19.7 Time History Analysis

Opens the Analysis Type dialog box.

Press the New button located in the Opens the New Case Definition dialog box
lower portion of the dialog box

Set the name of a new case as The Time History Analysis dialog box.
Time_1, activate the Time history
analysis,
OK, accept with Yes the warning
about the result status change

Click the Function definition button Opens the Time Function Definition dialog box.

In the Function name field enter the Defines the function name.
name: Wind blast,
Add

Switch to the Points tab, which The Time Function Definition will be shaped as indicated
appears in the dialog box and define in the picture below. Closes the dialog box.
the following points and
corresponding values of the function
using Add button:
T = 0.0 ⇒ F(T) = 0
T = 0.1 ⇒ F(T) = 1
T = 0.2 ⇒ F(T) = 0
T = 1.0 ⇒ F(T) = 0,
Close

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 287


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Select the WIND 1 load case, Closes the Time History Analysis dialog box.
Add, OK

Start the calculations clicking


the Calculations button

Results / Advanced / Time History Opens the Time History Analysis dialog box.
Analysis - Diagrams

Press the Add button and then set all Opens the Diagram Definition dialog box.
the options as shown in the picture
below, Add

288 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Close the dialog box. The recently Transfers the chosen quantity to the right panel.
defined value of displacement in the Opens the viewer as shown in the picture below.
z direction will appear in the left
Available diagrams panel, highlight it.
Press the button, Apply

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 289


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

20. Definition of an RC Container


The example presents definition of a reinforced container. Load combinations containing pressure and
temperature load cases have been applied here. The American code ACI 318/99 has been used for
reinforcement calculations.
Data units: (ft) and (kip).
The following rules apply during structure definition:
• any icon symbol means that the relevant icon is pressed with the left mouse button,
• ( x ) stands for selection of the ‘x’ option in the dialog box or entering the ‘x’ value,
• LMC and RMC - abbreviations for the Left Mouse button Click and the Right Mouse button Click.

To run structure definition start the Robot program (press the appropriate icon or select the command
from the taskbar). The vignette window (described in chapter 2.1 of the manual) will be displayed on

the screen and the icon in the second row (Shell Design) should be selected.

290 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

20.1 Structure Definition

Structural Axis Definition

PERFORMED OPERATION DESCRIPTION

Opens the Structural Axis dialog box.

Set the following options: Inserts axes defined in the edit fields. The result of this
in the Position field - leave operation can be seen in the picture below.
the default value (0.00),
in the No. of Repet. field - set {2},
in the Distance field - type 20.0 ft,
Insert

Switch to the Y tab and set: Inserts axes defined in the edit fields.
in the Position field - (0.00),
in the No. of Repet. field – type {1},
in the Distance field - enter 20.0 ft,
in the Numbering field – select A,B,C
Insert

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 291


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Afterwards go to the Z tab set: Displays the defined structure axis on the screen, closes the
in the Position field - (0.00), Structural Axis dialog box.
in the No. of Repet. field – type {1},
in the Distance field - enter 10.0 ft,
in the Numbering field select Define
option and in the field on the right
type Level 1, Insert, Apply, Close

View / Projection / 3D xyz Displays a 3D view of the structure (see below).

New Thickness Definition

Geometry / Properties / Thickness Opens the New Thickness dialog box.

Opens the New Thickness dialog box.

On the Homogeneous tab enter: Defines new thickness for walls.


Thickness field: {10},
Material field: Concrete
Label field: TH10_CONCR for
the defined thickness type, Add

On the Homogeneous tab enter: Defines new thickness for the bottom. The recently defined
Thickness field: {12}, thickness will appear in the Active Thickness Type list.
3
Elastic Foundation field: 320 (kip/ft )
Material: Concrete
Label field: TH12_CONCR, Add,
Close

Close Closes the FE Thickness dialog box.

Reinforcement Definition

Opens the Plate\Shell Reinforcement Type dialog box.

Opens the Reinforcement Parameters dialog box.

292 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

On the General tab activate Along Defines new reinforcement parameters, closes the dialog
X-Axis option in the Main box.
reinforcement direction field and
define the name as Dir_X. In the
Reinforcement calculations for shells
field select the Type: bending +
compression/tension option. On the
SLS Parameters tab switch on
the Cracking option located in the
Calculation range field.
Other parameters leave as default.
Add, Close

Defines new reinforcement parameters, closes


Once again press the icon, then Reinforcement Parameters dialog box.
on the General tab activate Along Z-
Axis option and enter the name:
Dir_Z. In the Reinforcement
calculations for shells field select the
Type: bending + compression
/tension option. On the SLS
Parameters tab switch on the
Cracking option located in the
Calculation range field. Other
parameters leave as default. Add,
Close

Close Closes the Plate\Shell Reinforcement Type dialog box.

Definition of a Contour of the Longer Side Wall

View / Work in 3D / Global Work Opens the Work Plane dialog box.
Plane

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 293


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Place the cursor at the point Enters the appropriate coordinates to the Work Plane
determined by the intersection of the dialog box (see the picture below).
following axes: 1, B, Level 1
Apply, Close

View / Projection / Zx Once this option is selected the structure is set on the ZX
plane at the recently defined Y-coordinate value (in the
example Y = 20).

Opens the Polyline - Contour dialog box with the Contour


option switched on.

Press the Geometry button Opens the Geometry portion of the dialog box.

Switch to the graphic viewer, indicate Defines the first contour of the longer side wall.
the following points of the contour of Note: to finish contour definition the user should indicate
the longer side wall as the once again the first point of the contour or type its
intersection points of the following coordinates.
structure axes:
1, Level 2,
2, Level 2,
2, Level 1,
1, Level 1,
1, Level 2

Define manually the following points Defines the second contour of the longer side wall. Closes
in the green field in the geometry the Polyline - Contour dialog box.
portion of the dialog box:
(20.0, 20.0, 10.0), Add
(40.0, 20.0, 10.0), Add
(40.0, 20.0, 0.0), Add
(20.0, 20.0, 0.0), Add
(20.0, 20.0, 10.0), Add
Close

Definition of a Panel of the Longer Side Wall

View / Projection / 3D xyz Displays a 3D view of the defined structure.

Geometry / Panels Opens the Panel dialog box.

294 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

In the Properties field select Dir_Z Defines panels in the construction as shown in the picture
reinforcement type from the available below.
reinforcement list. In the Thickness
field apply the TH10_CONCR
thickness. To assign properties of
the recently defined panel activate
the Internal Point option and indicate
a point within each of the two panels
of the longer side wall or provide the
numbers (1 and 2) of objects which
the contour consists of.
Close

View / Display Opens the Display dialog box.

Turn off the Numbers and panel Displays only the elements chosen, closes the dialog box.
description option on the Finite
Elements tab,
Turn on the Translucent faces option
and Color faces on the Hidden lines
tab,
Apply, OK

Bottom Contour Definition

View / Work in 3D / Global Work Opens the Work Plane dialog box.
Plane

Place the cursor at the point Results in entering the appropriate coordinates to the Work
determined by the intersection of the Plane dialog box.
following axes: 1, A, Level 1
Apply, Close

View / Projection / Xy Displays the XY projection. Once the option is selected the
structure is set on the XY plane at the recently defined Z
coordinate value (default value: Z = 0).

Geometry / Objects / Polyline - Opens the Polyline - Contour dialog box with Contour
contour option switched on.

Press the Geometry button Opens the Geometry portion of the dialog box.

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 295


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Switch to the graphic viewer and Defines first contour of the bottom.
indicate the consecutive points of the
bottom contour as the intersection
points of following structure axes:
1, B,
2, B,
2, A,
1, A,
1, B

Define manually the following points Defines second contour of the bottom. Closes the Polyline -
in the green field in the geometry Contour dialog box.
portion of the dialog box:
(20.0, 20.0, 0.0), Add
(40.0, 20.0, 0.0), Add
(40.0, 0.0, 0.0), Add
(20.0, 0.0, 0.0), Add
(20.0, 20.0, 0.0), Add
Close

View / Projection / 3d xyz Displays the 3D structure projection - see the picture below.

Bottom Panel Definition

Opens the Panel dialog box.

In the Properties field select Defines panels in the construction - see the picture below.
the Dir_X reinforcement type from
the available reinforcement list. In
the Thickness field apply the
TH12_CONCR thickness. To assign
properties of the recently defined
panel activate the Internal Point
option and indicate a point within
each of the two bottom panels or
provide the numbers (3 and 4) of the
objects that the contour consists of,
Close

296 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Definition of a Contour of the Shorter Side Wall

View / Projection / Yz Displays the YZ plane at the recently defined X coordinate


value (the default value: X = 0).

Geometry / Objects / Polyline - Opens the Polyline - Contour dialog box with Contour
contour option switched on.

Press the Geometry button Opens the Geometry portion of the dialog box.

Switch to the graphic viewer and Defines the shorter wall contour, closes the Polyline -
indicate the consecutive points of the Contour dialog box.
contour of the shorter side wall as
the intersection points of the
following structure axes:
A, Level 2,
B, Level 2,
B, Level 1,
A, Level 1,
A, Level 2
Close

View / Projection / 3d xyz Displays the 3D structure projection, see the picture below

Definition of the Shorter Wall Panel

Opens the Panel dialog box.

In the Properties field select Defines panels in the construction - see the picture below.
the Dir_Z reinforcement type from
the available reinforcement list. In
the Thickness field apply the
TH10_CONCR thickness. To assign
properties of the recently defined
panel activate the Internal Point
option and indicate a point within
the shorter side wall panel or provide
the number (5) of the object that the
contour consists of,
Close

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 297


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

To check panel geometry Opens the Display dialog box.


and reinforcement type select View /
Display from the menu

On the Finite Elements tab switch on Displays the required elements on the screen.
the Numbers and panel description
option and on the Others tab turn off
the Structural Axis option, OK

Copying of the Walls

Opens the Display dialog box.

On the Finite Elements tab switch off Displays selected elements, closes the dialog box.
the Numbers and panel description
option and on the Others tab turn on
the Structural Axis option.
Apply, OK

View / Projection / 3d xyz Displays the 3D structure projection.

Switch to the graphic viewer and Selects the shorter wall members.
select the shorter wall panel (color of
the selected panel changes to red).

Edit / Edit / Translate Opens the Translation dialog box.

Define the translation vector Translates the selected elements, closes the dialog box.
manually by typing in the coordinates The result of the operation is shown in the picture below.
(20,0,0) of the vector or
the appropriate node numbers in
the Translation Vector edit field; in
the Number of Repetitions field set
the number of repetitions as 2.
Execute, Close

298 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Select the longer wall panels with the Selects the longer wall panels.
CTRL key pressed (the color of the
selected panels changes to red).

Edit / Edit / Translate Opens the Translation dialog box.

In the Number of Repetitions field Translates the selected elements (see the picture below),
define the number of repetitions (1); closes the dialog box.
define the translation vector in
the graphical way,
Close

Definition of the Container Wall Orientation

View / Display Opens the Display dialog box.

On the Structure tab select the Local Displays the local system, closes the Display dialog box.
system option Note: All changes will be performed to obtain the local
Apply, OK coordinate system orientation as in the picture
below.

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 299


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Geometry / Properties / Local Panel Opens the Local System Orientation dialog box.
Direction

To change the sense of the normal Changes the orientation of the bottom panels.
for the bottom panels indicate the
two bottom panels for which the local
coordinate system is to be changed,
select the Change of local Z-axis
sense option, Apply

To change the sense of the normal Changes the orientation for the selected panels.
for the longer side wall panels locate
the cursor in the Panels field and
enter numbers of the appropriate
panels (in the example 8 and 9),
Apply

Check the same parameters for


other walls and modify them if
necessary

View / Display Opens the Display dialog box.

On the Others tab turn off Displays selected elements on the screen, closes
the Structural Axis option, OK the Display dialog box.

Additional Node Definition

Opens the Nodes dialog box presented in the picture below.

Enter in the Coordinates field: Defines a node at the geometrical center of the bottom,
(20.00,10.00,0.00), Add, Close closes the Nodes dialog box.

300 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Support Definition

Opens the Supports dialog box.

Opens the Support Definition dialog box, which allows


definition of the structure support.

On the Rigid tab set on UX, UY and Once these options are selected the displacements in the X
RZ option. and Y direction as well as the rotation about Z-axis will be
blocked.

In the Label field set the name for Adds a new support blocking the rotation around Z-axis and
new support (in the exercise the displacement along X and Y-axis, closes the dialog box.
Support_1). Others parameters leave
as default, Add, Close

From the list of active supports select Applies the fixed support type to the chosen edges.
the support type Fixed on the Linear
tab, LMC in the Current Selection
field, and then select graphically, with
the CTRL key pressed, all external
lines surrounding bottom panels,
Apply

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 301


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

From the list of active supports select Applies the support which appears on the graphic viewer.
the type (Support_1) on the Nodal
tab and in the Current Selection field
select a node (no. 1 at the
geometrical center of the bottom),
Apply, Close

Mesh Parameters Definition

Tools / Job Preferences / Meshing Opens the Advanced Meshing Options dialog box.
Options Modification,
press the Advanced options button
in the Meshing Options dialog box

In the Mesh generation field activate Defines mesh generation options, closes the Advanced
the User optionand enter 6 in the Meshing Options dialog box.
Division 1 and Division 2 fields. Other
parameters leave as default,
OK

OK Closes the Job preferences dialog box.

20.2 Load Definition

Loads / Loads Types Opens the Load Types dialog box.

In the Load Types set the load nature Defines the load nature (dead) with the standard name
as dead and press the New button (DL1).

Set the load nature as live and press Defines two live loads with the standard names (LL1, LL2).
the New button twice

To define the subsequent Defines the load nature (temperature) with the standard
temperature load type, set the load name (TEMP1). The recently defined loads (DL1, LL1, LL2
nature as temperature and press the and TEMP1) appear on the list of available load cases
New button, Close (see the picture below). Closes the Load Types dialog box.

302 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Loads / Load Definition Opens the Load Definition dialog box.


Note: self-weight will be automatically applied to the whole
structure.

Selects load case.

Select the LL1 case on the list of


load cases

Switch to the Surface tab and select Opens the Pressure dialog box.
the Hydrostatic Pressure option

In the opened dialog box enter the Defines hydrostatic load parameters, closes the Pressure
following values: dialog box.
{0.10} in the Pressure value P field
{0.15} in the Unit weight of liquid field
{7} in the Liquid level h field, Add

Select the entire external wall Applies a load resulting from backfill pressure (LL1) to the
(except the bottom walls) with CTRL, chosen panels.
Apply

Select the LL2 case on the list of Selects the load case.
load cases

Once again select the Hydrostatic Opens the Pressure dialog box.
Pressure option

Define the following parameters: Defines hydrostatic load parameters, closes the Pressure
{0} in the Pressure value P. field dialog box.
{0.12} in the Unit weight of liquid field
{10} in the Liquid level h field, Add

Select the walls of one of the Applies the load resulting from the pressure of water
container chambers (in the example contained in one chamber (LL2) to the selected panels as
the chamber on the right), Apply shown below.

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 303


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Select the TEMP1 case on the list of Selects a load case.


load cases

In the Surface tab select the Thermal Opens the Thermal Load 3p dialog box

Load 3p option

On the Values tab with the Uniform Defines temperature parameters, closes the dialog box.
option activated, enter the value: 30 Note: switching on the Uniform option ensures that
in the Gradient field, Add the temperature load applied to the surface structure
element (panel) will be uniform.
Select all the side walls and bottom Applies temperature gradient to the external wall surfaces
walls, Apply and the bottom (TEMP1).

Close Closes the Load Definition dialog box.

20.3 Definition of Load Combinations

Loads / Combinations Opens the Combination Definition/Modification dialog


box.

Define all the settings as shown in Opens the Combinations dialog box.
the picture below, OK

Select a load case from the Case Defines the factor value.
List, enter a factor value for the Note: If the auto option is selected, the factor defined for the
selected load case in the Factor field selected load nature will be applied automatically.

Defines load cases for the combination (as shown below),


Press the button and repeat the closes the Combinations dialog box. If all the defined load
above operations three times for the cases are to be considered in the combination, press the
consecutive load cases,
Apply, Close button.
Note: For all the natures, the default factors have been

applied and button used.

304 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

20.4 Result Analysis

Runs structure analysis.

Results / Maps Opens the Maps dialog box which is used to display the
calculation results in the map form.

View / Display Opens the Display dialog box.

Go to the Loads tab and switch off Stops presentation of the load symbols and the local
the Symbols option, system, closes the Display dialog box.
Go to the Structure tab and switch off
Local system option, OK

Selects a load case for presentation.

Detailed tab: select the z option in Displays maps of the displacement perpendicular to
the Displacements - u,w field, Scale the element’s surface on the screen (see the picture below).
tab: select the Basic option in the Note: only one value may be selected in the dialog box.
Color Palette field, Apply

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 305


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Results / Plate and Shell Results Opens the FE Results table.

Open the context menu (RMC), Opens the Results for Finite Elements dialog box.
select the Table columns option

Choose the Displacements u,w in Adds another column (with displacements included) to the
direction z option, OK table. Closes the dialog box.

20.5 Reinforcement Calculations

View / Projection / Xy Displays the XY plane for the recently defined Z-coordinate
(the default value: Z=0). Structure components from this
plane will be displayed.

Analysis / Design of RC Structure Displays graphic viewer, Plate and Shell Reinforcement
Elements / RC Plate and Shell and Reinforcements dialog boxes on the screen.
Design / Required Reinforcement

In the Reinforcements dialog box Defines reinforcement parameters.


switch on the Ay option in the [-]
Bottom line and then activate the
open new window with scale
displayed option.

In the Plate and Shell Opens the ULS selection dialog box.
Reinforcement dialog box press the
button in the ULS line

306 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

In the List of panels enter 3 4

Choose the third load case LL2 and Selects the load case, closes the ULS dialog box.

press the button, Close

Press the button next to the List


of panels edit field

In the Selection dialog box, on the Once the option is selected, the objects will be added to the
Attrib. tab select the Thickness current selection.
option, then in the selection field Note: if the selection has not been made, calculations will be
select TH12_CONCR (the thickness performed for the whole structure.
assigned to the bottom panels) and

press the button, Close

In the Method list select analytical Selects reinforcement calculation options, starts
method, Calculate calculations, displays results on the screen.
Note: White color in the reinforcement map means that in
this area the constructional reinforcement is needed.

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 307


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

20.6 Mesh Refinement

Analysis / Calculation Model / Opens the Advanced Meshing Options dialog box.
Meshing Options
Press the Advanced options button
in the Meshing Options dialog box
In the Mesh Generation field activate Changes meshing options, closes the dialog box.
the User option and enter 12 in the
Division 1 and Division 2 fields. Other
parameters leave as default, OK,
accept with Yes the warning about
the result status change

Analysis / Calculations Start calculations, displays the refined mesh on the screen -
see the picture at the example beginning.

Opens the Selection dialog box as shown below.

On the list under the All button select Selects panels, closes the dialog box.
the Panel option. In the field above
the Previous button enter the
numbers of panels to be chosen
(except for panel no. 9) 1to8, Close

Analysis / Calculation Model / Mesh Selecting these option results in freezing the mesh hitherto
Freeze generated for the finite elements. When the calculation
model is created again, the mesh will remain unchanged
(generation will be performed for panels for which a mesh of
finite elements has not been created).

Selects the Geometry layout from the list of available


Robot Millennium layouts.
Structure Model/Geometry

View / Projection / Zx Sets the structure on the ZX plane.

View / Work in 3D / Global Work Opens the Work Plane dialog box.
Plane Note: as the construction is set on the ZX plane, the Work
Plane dialog box will display only the Y coordinate
field unblocked.

308 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

In the Y coordinate field enter Selecting this option causes the construction to be edited
the value 0, while being projected on the ZX plane where the Y
Apply coordinate value equals 0.

Closes the Work Plane dialog box.

Opens the Objects toolbar and the Circle dialog box shown
below.

In the Definition Method part of the Selecting this option causes the circle to be defined using
dialog box select the center - radius the center and a point on its circumference.
option

Open the Geometry part of the dialog Defines circle, closes the dialog box.
box and define the circle by defining
the coordinates of the circle center
(30.00,0.00,5,00) and entering the
radius value (2,50) in the Radius
field, Apply, Close

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 309


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Analysis / Calculation Model / The program begins to generate the calculation model of
Generation the structure (finite elements).

View / Projection / 3d xyz Displays a 3D view of the structure.

Analysis / Calculations Starts calculations.

Structure Results/Results – maps

Detailed tab: select the z option in Displays maps of the displacement perpendicular to
the Displacements - u,w field, Scale the element’s surface on the screen (see the picture above).
tab: select the Automatic scale option Note: only one value may be selected in the dialog box.
in the Color Palette field, Apply

310 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

21. Definition of a Steel Container


The example presents definition of a steel container model. Hydrostatic pressure and temperature
loads as well as wind loads generated according to the ASCE 7-98 code are used here.

Data units: (ft) and (kip).


The following rules apply during structure definition:
• any icon symbol means that the relevant icon is pressed with the left mouse button,
• ( x ) stands for selection of the ‘x’ option in the dialog box or entering the ‘x’ value,
• LMC and RMC - abbreviations for the Left Mouse button Click and the Right Mouse button Click.

To run structure definition start the Robot program (press the appropriate icon or select the command
from the taskbar). The vignette window (described in chapter 2.1 of the manual) will be displayed on

the screen and the icon in the second row (Shell Design) should be selected.

21.1 Structure Definition

New Thickness Definition

Geometry / Properties / Thickness Opens the FE Thickness dialog box.

Opens the New Thickness dialog box.

On the Homogeneous tab enter: Defines new thickness for walls.


Thickness field: 1 (in),
Material field: STEEL
Label field: TH_1’’ for the defined
thickness type, Add, Close

Close Closes the FE Thickness dialog box.

Definition of a Cylinder Object

View / Projection / 3d xyz Displays the 3D structure projection

Geometry / Objects / Cylinder Opens the Cylinder dialog box.

Center-radius Changes the method of cylinder base definition to center


and radius.
Press the Geometry button Opens the Geometry portion of the dialog box.

Point P: 0.0; 0.0; 0.0 Defines center of the base at point (0; 0; 0), base radius 10
Radius: 10 (ft) and cylinder height 50 (ft).
Height: 50

Press the Parameters button Opens the Parameters portion of the dialog box.

Sides: 24 The base circle is approximated by a 2D figure having 24


Number of divisions: 10 sides, side surface of the cylinder is divided into 10 finite
elements over the height.

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 311


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Apply Defines the cylinder, see the figure below

Support Definition

Opens the Supports dialog box.

From the list of active supports select Defines a support on the cylinder base.
the Pinned support type onthe Planar
tab, LMC in the Current Selection
field and then select graphically the
bottom panel of the cylinder – object
1_REF(1),

Close Closes the Supports dialog box.

21.2 Load Definition

Loads / Load Types Opens the Load Types dialog box.

In the Load Types dialog box set the Defines the load nature (dead) with the standard name
load nature as dead and press the (DL1).
New button

Set the load nature as live and press Defines the live load with the standard name (LL1).
the New button

312 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

To define the subsequent Defines the load nature (temperature) with the standard
temperature load type, set the load name (TEMP1). The recently defined loads (DL1, LL1 and
nature as temperature and press the TEMP1) appear on the list of available load cases. Closes
New button, Close the Load Types dialog box.

Loads / Load Definition Opens the Load Definition dialog box.


Note: self-weight will be automatically applied to the whole
structure.

Select the LL1 case on the list of Selects load case.


load cases

Switch to the Surface tab and select Opens the Pressure dialog box.
the Hydrostatic Pressure icon

In the opened dialog box enter the Defines hydrostatic load parameters, closes the Pressure
following values: dialog box.
{0.15} in the Unit weight of liquid field
{40} in the Liquid level h field,
Add

On the Apply to list enter the number Defines hydrostatic load on the cylinder
of the cylinder object: 1,
Apply

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 313


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Positive hydrostatic pressure in the program acts in


conformity with the normal axis sense in the local system of
the plane; take note that in the cylinder base the system
should be reversed for the load to act in conformity with the
hydrostatic pressure

Definition of the Cylinder Wall Orientation

Geometry / Properties / Local Panel Opens the Local System Orientation dialog box.
Direction

To change the sense of the normal Changes the orientation of the bottom panels.
to the bottom panels indicate the
bottom panel of cylinder – object
1_REF(1),
select the Change of local Z-axis
sense option,
Apply, close the Local System
Orientation dialog box

Load applied to the cylinder base has been reversed


together with the normal axis sense in the local system of
the plane.

Temperature Load Definition

Select the TEMP1 case on the list of Selects the load case.
load cases

On the Surface tab select the Opens the Thermal Load 3p dialog box
Thermal Load 3p option

314 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

In the Values field with the Uniform Defines temperature parameters, closes the dialog box.
option activated, enter the value: 100
in the Temperature dT1 field,
Add

Select the side walls of the cylinder Applies temperature to the external wall surfaces (TEMP1).
(object 1_Side(1)),
Apply

Close Closes the Load Definition dialog box.

Wind Load Definition

Loads / Special loads / Wind on Opening of the Snow/Wind Loads dialog box for wind load
cylinders generation according to ASCE 7-98

Define the following parameters: The program generates the wind load from the direction X+
active options: for the object with vertical axis Z, at point (0; 0; 0)
Wind : X+

change the option: Note: The number of faces should be congruous with the
Structure type Category: round number of faces in an axisymmetric object.
moderately smooth
Number of faces: 24

Press the Parameters button Opens the additional dialog box (Snow/Wind Loads),
where detailed parameters may be defined

Define parameters of the snow/wind Defines parameters of wind loads


load:
General tab:
Exposure category: A
Building category: II
Basic wind velocity: 90 (mph)

the Specific tab: Defines parameters of wind loads

For Gust effect factor Gset the value


Building natural frequency - n1 : 6.66 Note: the natural frequency can be calculated by means of
dynamic modal analysis.

the Segments tab: Defines successive segments. For each of the segments,
i.e. parts over the object height, the wind load is generated
Define Name: A, Height 30 (ft), New independently because of varying wind pressure or structure
Define Name: B, Height 50 (ft), New width.

Generate Pressing the button starts the generation of snow and wind
loads with the accepted parameters.

Close the editor showing the The calculation note appears on the screen. It presents the
calculation notes parameters of snow/wind load cases

View / Display Opens the Display dialog box.

Go to the Loads tab and switch on Presents the load symbols, closes the Display dialog box.
the Symbols option,
OK

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 315


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

21.3 Definition of Load Combinations

Loads / Combinations Opens the Combination Definition / Modification dialog


box.

Define all the settings as shown in Opens the Combinations dialog box.
the picture below,
OK

Select a load case from the Case Defines the factor value.
List, enter a factor value for the Note: if the auto option is selected, the factor defined for the
selected load case in the Factor field selected load nature will be applied automatically
according to the code combination selected in Job
Preferences.

Defines load cases for the combination (as shown below).


Press the button and repeat the
above operations three times for the
consecutive load cases (1 to 3),
Apply,

316 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

New Defines a new combination.

Yes in the message box Saves the previous combination

Default settings, Applies default settings and name to the new combination.
OK Opens the Combinations dialog box.

Choose a load case and press the Defines load cases for the combination: DL1 + LL1 + WindX
button for the load cases (1 2
and 4),
Apply,

New Defines a new combination.

Yes int the message box Saves the previous combination

Default settings, Applies default settings and name to the new combination.
OK Opens the Combinations dialog box.

Choose a load case and press the Defines load cases for the combination: DL1 + Wind X.
Closes the Combinations dialog box.
button for the load cases (1 and
4),
Apply, Close

21.4 Result Analysis

Runs structure analysis.

View / Display Opens the Display dialog box.

Go to the Loads tab and switch off Stops presentation of the load symbols.
the Symbols option

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 317


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Go to the Finite elements tab and Stops presentation of the object descriptions; closes the
switch off the Numbers and panels Display dialog box.
description option, OK

Results / Maps Opens the Maps dialog box, which is used to display the
calculation results in the map form.

Selects a load case for presentation.

The envelope of all combination cases will be displayed on


maps.

Detailed tab: select the z option in Displays maps of the displacement normal to the element’s
the Displacements - z field, surface on the screen (see the figure below).
Apply

Open new window with scale Opens a new window with the view of a displacement map
displayed, and scale.
Apply

Results / Plate and Shell Results Opens the FE Results table.

318 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Open the context menu (RMC), Opens the Results for Finite Elements dialog box.
select the Table columns option

Switch on the None option on the Excludes results given on the Detailed tab from the table.
Detailed tab

The Complex tab; switch on Adds to the table – stresses reduced according to the von
Stresses-s Mises hypothesis.

The Parameter tab; change the Selects stresses for the upper layer,
Layer selection to upper, OK Closes the Results for Finite Elements dialog box.

Selects the load case for presentation.

The combination cases will be displayed in the table.

Change to Global extremes tab in the Calculates maximum stresses for combination cases in the
table. table.

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 319


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

22. Definition of a Solid / Thin-walled Section


The example presents the definition of solid/thin-walled sections. The results obtained for the sections
mentioned are also presented here. The sections are saved to the user’s database.
Data units: (ft) and (kip).

The following rules apply during structure definition:


• any icon symbol means that the relevant icon is pressed with the left mouse button,
• ( x ) stands for selection of the ‘x’ option in the dialog box or entering the ‘x’ value,
• LMC and RMC - abbreviations for the Left Mouse button Click and the Right Mouse button Click.

To run structure definition start the Robot program (press the appropriate icon or select the command
from the taskbar). The vignette window (described in chapter 2.1 of the manual) will be displayed on

the screen and the icon in the last row (Section definition) should be selected.

22.1 Solid Section

PERFORMED OPERATION DESCRIPTION

File / New Section / Solid Starts definition of a solid section.

View / Grid Step Opens the Grid step definition dialog box.

{Dx}, {Dy} = 0.2 Defines a grid step.

Apply, Close Closes the dialog box.

Opens the Circle dialog box.

Enter the following points in the Defines the external circle.


Center and Radius fields:
Center: (0,0), Radius: 4, Apply

Enter the following points in the Defines the internal circle.


Center and Radius fields:
Center: (0,0), Radius: 3.8, Apply

Closes the Circle dialog box.

LMC on the external contour Selects the external contour.

Contour / Properties Opens the Properties dialog box.

STEEL, Apply, Cancel Selects the material type and closes the dialog box.

Results / Geometric Properties / Starts calculations of section properties. The dialog box
Results presented below is opened on the screen.

320 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Switch on the Torsional constant Starts calculations of the torsional constant. The results are
option, Calculate presented on the Principal tab.

Calculation Note Opens the calculation note with the section data and results.

Close the calculation note

LMC on the Close button Closes the Results dialog box.

File / Save to Databases Opens the Saving section to databases dialog box.

Enter: Sets the section properties.


Database: User
Name: Circ
Dimension 1: 4.0
Dimension 2: 0.2
Dimension 3: 0.2

Section Type: select circle symbol Selects the section type.

Enter: h = 4.0, t = 0.2 Defines section dimensions.

OK Saves the section to the database.

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 321


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

22.2 Thin-Walled Section

Starts definition of the thin-walled section.

Opens the Section definition dialog box.

Selects the method of section definition.

Enter a thickness value: 0.08 Defines the thickness of the thin-walled section.

Enter the following points: Defines the characteristic points of a Z-shaped section.
P1 (0.0, 0.0), Apply
P2 (3.0, 0.0), Apply
P2 (0.0, -3.0), Apply
P2 (3.0, -3.0), Apply

Closes the Section definition dialog box.

Results / Geometric Properties / Starts calculations of section properties. The dialog box
Results presented below is opened on the screen.

LMC on the Close button Closes the Results dialog box.

Results / Geometric Properties / Opens the Diagrams dialog box.


Graphical Results

322 Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com


ROBOT MILLENNIUM v 19.0 - TRAINING MANUAL UPDATE, November 2005

Turn the Somega (s) option on, Selection of section properties for presentation.
Apply The diagram shown below will be presented on the Z-
shaped section.

Close Closes the Diagrams dialog box.

Web: www.robot-structures.com e-mail : sales@robobat.fr.com Techsupport : service@robot-structures.com 323

You might also like